4. Tie slab bars at every intersection around periphery of slab.
5. Tie wall bars and slab bar intersections other than around periphery at not less than every fourth intersection, but at not greater than following maximum spacings:
Bar Size
Slab Bars
Spacing
(Inches)
Wall Bars
Spacing
(Inches)
Bars Number 5 and Smaller 60 48
Bars Number 6 through Number 9 96 60
Bars Number 10 and Number 11 120 96
6. After tying wire ties, bend ends of wire ties in towards the center of the concrete section. Wire ties shall conform to the cover requirements of the reinforcing bars.
7. Above tying requirements do not apply to reinforcement for masonry. Refer to DIVISION 4 for tying requirements for masonry.
D. Lap Splices of Reinforcing Bars:
1. Where bars are to be lapped spliced at joints in concrete, ensure bars project from concrete first placed, minimum length equal to lap splice length indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, then provide lap splice length as specified in ACI 318 and this Division.
E. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcement:
1. Install necessary wiring, spacing chairs, or supports to keep welded wire fabric in place while concrete is being placed.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03200-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Bend fabric as indicated on the Drawings or required to fit work.
3. Unroll or otherwise straighten fabric to make perfectly flat sheet before placing in the Work.
4. Lap splice welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings.
5. If lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, splice fabric in accordance with ACI 318.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03150 - Concrete Accessories.
2. Section 03366 - Tooled Concrete Finishes.
3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
2. 305R-10 Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
3. 306R-10 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
4. Manual of Concrete Practice.
5. Recommended Practices.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C31 - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
2. C33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
4. C40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete.
5. C42 - Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
6. C88 - Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
7. C94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
8. C114 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
9. C131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
10. C136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
11. C143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
12. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
13. C157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete.
14. C172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
15. C173 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
16. C203 - Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation.
17. C227 - Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
18. C260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
19. C289 - Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
20. C309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
21. C311 - Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete.
22. C469 - Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression.
23. C494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
24. C595M - Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
25. C618 - Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete.
26. D75 - Practices for Sampling Aggregates.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Alkali: Is defined to mean sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as sodium oxide.
B. Hairline Crack: Crack with a crack width of less than 4 thousandths of an inch.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. General:
a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in accordance with requirements as specified in this Section and suitable to specific conditions of placement.
b. Proportion materials in manner such as to secure lowest water-cement ratio which is consistent with good workability, plastic, cohesive mixture, and one which is within specified slump range.
c. Proportion fine and coarse aggregate in manner such as not to produce harshness in placing nor honeycombing in structures.
2. Watertightness of Concrete Work: It is intent of this Section to secure for every part of the Work concrete and grout of homogeneous structure, which when hardened will have required strength, watertightness, and durability. a. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will develop in the concrete surfaces.
b. Construction, contraction, and expansion joints have been positioned in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods specified, for purpose of reducing number and size of these expected cracks, due to normal expansion and contraction expected from specified concrete mixes. c. Class A, Class B, and Class D Concrete: Watertight: Repair cracks which develop in walls or slabs and repair cracks which show any signs of leakage until all leakage is stopped.
d. Pressure inject visible cracks, other than hairline cracks and crazing, in following areas with epoxy as approved by the Engineer. 1) Floors and walls of water bearing structures.
2) Walls and overhead slabs of passageways or occupied spaces, outsides of which are exposed to weather or may be washed down and are not specified to receive separate waterproof membrane. 3) Other Items Not Specified to Receive Separate Waterproof Membrane:
Slabs over water channels, wet wells, reservoirs, and other similar surfaces.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set e. Walls or slabs, as specified above, that leak or sweat because of porosity or cracks too small for successful pressure grouting: Seal on water or weather side by coatings of surface sealant system, as specified in this Section. f. Grouting and Sealing: Continue as specified above until structure is watertight and remains watertight for not less than one year after final acceptance or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time.
3. Workmanship and Methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in ACI 318, Manuals, and Recommended Practices.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data completely describing products.
B. Information on Heating Equipment to Be Used for Cold Weather Concreting: Submit information on type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new concrete in process of curing during excessively cold weather.
C. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low Humidity, high temperature, and wind: Submit corrective measures proposed for use prior to placing concrete.
D. Copies of Tests of Concrete Aggregates: Submit certified copies in triplicate of commercial laboratory tests of all samples of concrete aggregates.
1. Fine Aggregate:
a. Clay lumps.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
d. Soundness.
e. Color.
f. Decantation.
2. Coarse Aggregate:
a. Clay lumps and friable particles.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
d. Soundness.
e. Abrasion loss.
f. Coal and ignite.
g. Materials finer than 200 sieve.
E. Sieve Analysis: Submit sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates being used in triplicate at least every 3 weeks and at any time there is significant change in grading of materials.
F. Concrete Mixes: Submit full details, including mix design calculations for concrete mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete.
1. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents of fine aggregate.
2. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal. a. Include calculations for f'cr based on source quality test records.
3. Trial batch results may not be required if adequate, recent test results for the mix design are submitted, meeting all of the requirements of this Specification Section, including the requirements of Section 03300-2.04.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set G. If There Is Change in Aggregate Source, or Aggregate Quality from Same Source:
Submit new set of design mixes covering each class of concrete.
H. Test Batch Test Data:
1. Submit data for each test cylinder.
2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.
I. Sequence of Concrete Placing: Submit proposed sequence of placing concrete showing proposed beginning and ending of individual placements.
J. Curing Compound Other than Specified Compound: Submit complete data on proposed compound.
K. Repair of Defective Concrete: Submit mix design for grout.
L. Acceptance of Method of Concrete Repair: Make no repair until the ENGINEER has reviewed and accepted method of preparing surfaces and proposed method of repair.
M. If Either Fine or Coarse Aggregate Is Batched from More than One Bin: Submit analyses for each bin, and composite analysis made up from these, using proportions of materials to be used in mix.
N. Cement Mill Tests: Include alkali content, representative of each shipment of cement for verification of compliance with specified requirements.
O. Pozzolan Certificate of Compliance: Identify source of pozzolan and certify compliance with requirements of ASTM C 618.
P. Information on mixing equipment.
Q. Drying shrinkage test data.
R. Modulus of elasticity test data.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping:
1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner as to prevent damage and inclusion of foreign substances.
2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use.
3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of specified degree of uniformity and slump.
B. Acceptance at Site: Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of water or other damage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Hot Weather Concreting:
a. When Ambient Air Temperature Is above 90 Degrees Fahrenheit: Prior to placing concrete, cool forms and reinforcing steel to by water cooling to below 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Temperature of Concrete Mix at Time of Placement: Keep temperature below 90 degrees Fahrenheit by methods which do not impair quality of concrete.
2. Cold Weather Concreting:
a. Concrete placed below ambient air temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit and falling or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: Make provision for heating water. b. If materials have been exposed to freezing temperatures to degree that any material is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit: Heat such materials. c. Heating Water, Cement, or Aggregate Materials:
1) Do not heat in excess of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Protection of Concrete in Forms:
1) Protect by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other acceptable covering.
2) Provide means for circulating warm moist air around forms in manner to maintain temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 5 days.
3. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low humidity, high temperature, and wind: Take corrective measures to minimize rapid water loss from concrete.
a. Furnish and use sufficient number of maximum and minimum self-recording thermometers to adequately measure temperature around concrete.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete any single placing operation to construction, contraction, or expansion joint.
B. Schedule placing of concrete such that new concrete pours shall not be poured against existing concrete until the existing concrete is a minimum of 14 days old.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate:
1. General:
a. Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and free of deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified. b. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM D75 and C136. c. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate which produces in place concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural sand or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel.
2. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of following percentages by weight of contaminating substances. In no case shall total exceed percent listed.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set Item Test Method Percent
Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.) ASTM C 117 3
Shale or Chert ASTM C 295 1
Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1
3. Except as otherwise specified, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in accordance with requirements of ASTM C33.
C. Coarse Aggregate:
1. General: Provide coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone made up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings, organic matter, or other foreign substances.
2. Weight: Not exceeding 15 percent, for thin or elongated pieces having length greater than 5 times average thickness.
3. Deleterious Substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight, and in no case having total of all deleterious substances exceeding 2 percent.
Item Test Method Percent
Shale or chert ASTM C 295 1
Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 1/4
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1/4
Materials finer than Number 200 sieve ASTM C 117 1/2*
* Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, maximum amount shall be 1 percent.
4. Grading:
a. Aggregate: As specified in ASTM C33, Size Number 57, except as otherwise specified or authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
b. Aggregate for Class CE Concrete for Encasement of Electrical Conduits:
1) Graded as specified in ASTM C33, Size Number 8.
2) Provide concrete utilizing this aggregate equal to Class C concrete in all other respects, and is designated as Class CE.
D. Portland Cement:
1. General: Conform to specifications and tests for ASTM C150, Types II modified/ Type V, Low Low Alkali, except as specified otherwise.
2. Exposed Concrete in Any Individual Structure: Use only one brand of portland cement.
3. Cement for Finishes: Provide cement from same source and of same type as concrete to be finished.
E. Admixtures:
1. General:
a. Do not use admixtures of any type, except as specified, unless written authorization has been obtained from the ENGINEER.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Compatible with concrete and other admixtures.
c. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in excess of 0.5 percent by weight.
d. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and add each admixture to concrete mix separately.
2. Air Entraining Admixture:
a. Provide all concrete with 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, entrained air of evenly dispersed air bubbles at time of placement.
b. Conform to ASTM C 260.
3. Fly Ash Pozzolan Admixture:
a. Pozzolan:
1) Conforming to requirements of ASTM C618, Class F, may be used as admixture in concrete made with Type II Portland cement. 2) Pozzolan may replace portland cement at ratio of 1.0 pound fly ash for each pound of portland cement replaced.
3) Maximum of 15 percent by weight of minimum quantities of portland cement listed in Table A under paragraph 2.03E may be replaced with pozzolan.
4) Do not use pozzolan as an admixture in concrete made with portlandpozzolan cement. b. Loss on Ignition for Pozzolan: Not exceed four percent.
4. Water Reducing Admixture:
a. May be used at the CONTRACTOR's option.
b. Conform to ASTM C494, Type A or Type D.
c. Not contain air entraining agents.
d. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix.
e. No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing admixture.
5. Superplasticizers: Are not to be used without review and approved by ENGINEER in writing.
F. Water:
1. Water for Concrete, Washing Aggregate, and Curing Concrete: Clean and free from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other substances.
2. Chlorides and Sulfate Ions:
a. Water for Conventional Reinforced Concrete: Use water not containing more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion. b. Water for Prestressed or Post-tensioned Concrete: Use water not containing more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion.
G. Nonslip Abrasive:
1. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard aggregate, homogenous, nonglazing, rustproof, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning compounds.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Washington Mills, Niagara Falls, New York.
b. Abrasive Materials, Incorporated, Hillsdale, Michigan.
H. Concrete Sealer:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. ChemMasters, Madison, OH, Spray-Cure & Seal 25
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-8 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. A. C. Horn, Inc., Horn Clear Seal EM-180.
I. Conduit Encasement Coloring Agent:
1. Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits, similar type items.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.
a. Davis Colors, Tile Red.
b. I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product.
J. Keyway Material: Steel, plastic, or lumber.
K. Sprayed Membrane Curing Compound: Clear type with fugitive dye conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1D.
L. Surface Sealant System: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7.
2. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Duripal.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Concrete:
1. Mixers may be of stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type.
2. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material.
3. Mixing Equipment:
a. Capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water within specified time into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging mixture without segregation.
b. Maintain concrete mixing plant and equipment in good working order and operated at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by manufacturer or as specified.
c. Proportion cement and aggregate by weight.
B. Machine Mixing:
1. Batch plant shall be capable of controlling delivery of all material to mixer within 1 percent by weight of individual material.
2. If bulk cement is used, weigh it on separate visible scale which will accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation from zero to full capacity.
3. Prevent cement from coming into contact with aggregate or with water until materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing water.
4. Procedure of mixing cement with sand or with sand and coarse aggregate for delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing water will not be permitted.
5. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
6. Discharge entire batch before recharging.
7. Volume of Mixed Material per Batch: Not exceed manufacturer's rated capacity of mixer.
8. Mixers:
a. Perform mixing in batch mixers of acceptable type.
b. Equip each mixer with device for accurately measuring and indicating quantity of water entering concrete, and operating mechanism such that leakage will not occur when valves are closed.
c. Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring, indicating, and controlling time required for mixing.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-9 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 1) Interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before expiration of mixing period.
C. Transit-mixed Concrete:
1. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94.
2. Total Elapsed Time Between Addition of Water at Batch Plant and Discharging Completed Mix: Not to exceed 90 minutes or elapsed time at project site shall not exceed 30 minutes.
3. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted may be reduced by the ENGINEER.
4. Equip each truck mixer with device interlocked so as to prevent discharge of concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum.
5. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely discharged its batch.
a. Do not admit water until drum has started revolving. b. Right is reserved to increase required minimum number of revolutions or to decrease designated maximum number of revolutions allowed, if necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The CONTRACTOR will not be entitled to additional compensation because of such increase or decrease.
D. Other Types of Mixers:
1. In Case of Other Types of Mixers, Mixing Shall Be as Follows:
a. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and discharge mixer completely before recharging.
b. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
c. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in drum, and for batches larger than one cubic yard increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof.
2.03 MIXES
A. Measurements of Materials:
1. Measure materials by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other methods are specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
2. Furnish apparatus for weighing aggregates and cement that is suitably designed and constructed for this purpose.
3. Accuracy of Weighing Devices: Furnish devices that have capability of providing successive quantities of individual material that can be measured to within one percent of desired amount of that material.
4. Measuring or Weighing Devices: Subject to review by the ENGINEER, and bear valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction.
5. Weighing Cement:
a. Weigh cement separately.
b. Cement in Unbroken Standard Packages (Sacks): Need not be weighed. c. Bulk Cement and Fractional Packages: Weigh such cement.
6. Mixing Water: Measured by volume or by weight.
B. Concrete Proportions and Consistency:
1. Concrete Consistency and Composition:
a. Provide concrete that can be worked readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on surface.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-10 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Prevent unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency of concrete.
2. Ratio of Coarse Aggregate to Fine Aggregate: Not less than 1.0 nor more than 2.0 for all concrete Classes, with exception of Class CE.
3. Aggregate:
a. Obtain aggregate from source which is capable of providing uniform quality, moisture content, and grading during any single day's operation.
4. Concrete Mix Water to Cement Ratio, Minimum Cement Content, and Slump Range: Conform to values specified in Table A in this Section.
5. Concrete Batch Weights: Control and adjust so as to secure maximum yield, and at all times maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits.
6. Mixture Modification: If required, by the ENGINEER, modify mixture within limits set forth in this Section.
C. Concrete Mixes:
1. Proportioning of Concrete Mix: Proportion mixes on required average on compressive strength f'cr as defined in Subparagraph 2.04A2.
2. Mixes:
a. Adjusting of Water: After acceptance, do not change mixes without acceptance by ENGINEER, except that at all times adjust batching of water to compensate for free moisture content of fine aggregate. b. Total Water Content of Each Concrete Class: Not exceed those specified in Table A in this Section.
c. Checking Moisture Content of Fine Aggregate: Furnish satisfactory means at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine aggregate.
3. Change in Mixes: Undertake new trial batch and test program as specified in this Section.
D. Hand Mixed Concrete:
1. Hand mix concrete only when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2. Prepare hand mixed concrete on watertight, level platform in batches not to exceed 1/3 cubic yard each.
3. Aggregate:
a. First spread required amount of coarse aggregate on platform in an even and uniform layer, and then over such aggregate spread proper proportion of fine aggregate.
b. Combined Depth of Both Such Layers: Not be greater than one foot.
4. Cement:
a. First evenly spread required quantity of cement over fine aggregate. b. Then turn entire batch with shovels at least twice before adding water.
5. Water:
a. Then uniformly sprinkle or spray proper amount of water over batched materials.
b. Then turn with shovels not less than three times before being removing from platform.
E. Classes of Concrete:
1. Provide concrete consisting of 5 classes, referred herein as Classes A, B, C, D, and CE specified in this Section and use where specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2. Weight of Concrete Classes: Provide classes of concrete having minimum weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Class B Concrete: Class B concrete may be substituted for Class A concrete, when high-early strength concrete is needed in areas specifically reviewed and approved by the ENGINEER and that do not require sulfate resistant concrete.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-11 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
4. Class C Concrete: Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of pipe, and where indicated on the Drawings.
5. Class D Concrete: Use Class D for precast concrete items.
6. Class CE Concrete: Use Class CE for electrical conduit encasements.
7. All other concrete, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings: Use Class A concrete.
"TABLE A
CONCRETE
WITH AIR ENTRAINMENT
Class
Specified
Compressive Strength
f'c at 28 Days (Pounds
per Square Inch)
Maximum Net
Water to
Cement Ratio
Minimum Cement per
Cubic Yard of
Concrete by Weight
(Pounds)
Slump
Range
(Inches)
A 4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4*
B
(Type III
cement)
4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4*
C 2,500 0.62 423 3 to 6
D 4,500 0.45 658 2 to 4
CE 2,500 0.62 564 3 to 6
* NOTE: Slump for slabs, decks, walks, and beams shall be not more than 3-1/2 inches.
Pumped Concrete: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all requirements of this Section.
9. Do not place concrete with slump outside limits indicated in Table A.
10. Classes:
a. Classes A, C, D, and CE Concrete: Make with Type II or modified Type V low alkali cement.
b. Class B Concrete: Make with Type III low alkali cement. c. Admixtures: Provide admixtures as specified in this Section.
F. Air Entraining Admixture:
1. Add agent to batch in portion of mixing water.
2. Batch solution by means of mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Concrete Mixes:
a. After concrete mixes have been reviewed and accepted by ENGINEER, have trial batches of the accepted Class A, Class B, and Class D concrete mix designs prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER. b. Prepare trial batches by using specified cement and aggregates proposed to be used for the Work.
c. Trial Batches: Provide batches of sufficient quantity to determine slump, workability, consistency, and finishing characteristics, and to provide sufficient test cylinders.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-12 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set d. Test Cylinders: Provide cylinders having six inch diameter by 12 inch length and that are prepared in accordance with ASTM C31 for tests specified in this Section.
e. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C143.
f. Test Cylinders from Trial Batch:
1) Test 8 cylinders for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39.
a) Test 4 cylinders at 7 days and 4 at 28 days.
b) Establish ratio between 7 day and 28 day strength for mix.
Seven day strength may be taken as satisfactory indication of 28 day strength upon review and approval by the Engineer provided effects on concrete of temperature and humidity between 7 day and 28 day are taken into account.
2) Average Compressive Strength of 4 Test Cylinders Tested at 28 Days:
Equal to or greater than required average compressive strength f'cr on which concrete mix design is based.
g. Drying Shrinkage:
1) Prepare 5 drying shrinkage specimens in accordance with ASTM C157, except as modified herein.
2) Remove drying shrinkage specimens from molds at age of 23 hours plus or minus 1 hour after trial batching, then immediately place them in water at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 3 degrees for at least 30 minutes and then measure specimens within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length. Then submerge specimens in saturated lime water at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus three degrees for moist curing.
3) Make measurement to determine expansion expressed as percentage of original length at age 7 days. Use length at age 7 days as base length for drying shrinkage calculations.
4) Immediately store specimens in humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus 3 degrees and 50 percent plus or minus 4 relative humidity for remainder of test.
5) Make and report measurements to determine shrinkage expressed as percentage of base length separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing.
6) Drying Shrinkage Deformation:
a) Measure drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as difference between base length and length after drying at each test age.
b) Measure average drying shrinkage deformation of specimens to nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age.
c) If drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from average of test age by more than 0.0004 inch, disregard results obtained from that specimen and test another specimen.
d) Shrinkage of trial batch concrete at 28 days drying age shall not exceed 0.045 percent maximum.
h. If trial batch tests do not meet specified requirements for slump, strength, workability, consistency, drying shrinkage, and finishing, change concrete mix design proportions and, if necessary, source of aggregate. Make additional trial batches and tests until an acceptable trial batch is produced that meets requirements of this Section.
i. Perform test batches and tests required to establish trial batches and acceptability of materials without change in Contract Price.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-13 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set j. Do not place concrete until the concrete mix design and trail batch have been reviewed and approved by ENGINEER.
2. Required Average Compressive Strength:
a. Determine required average compressive strength (f'cr) for selection of concrete proportions for mix design, for each class of concrete, using calculated standard deviation and its corresponding specified compressive strength f'c, in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350, Part 3, Chapter 5. b. When test records of at least 30 consecutive tests that span period of not less than 45 calendar days are available, establish standard deviation as described in ACI 318 and ACI 350, Part 3, Chapter 5 and as modified as follows herein. c. Provide test records from which to calculate standard deviation that represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to materials, quality control procedures, and conditions expected to apply in preparation of concrete for the Work.
d. Provide changes in materials and proportions within test records that are more restricted than those for the Work.
e. Specified Compressive Strength (f'c) of Concrete Used in Test Records:
Within 1,000 pounds per square inch of that specified for the Work. f. When lacking adequate test records for calculation of standard deviation meeting requirements, determine required average compressive strength f'cr from following Table B.
TABLE B
Specified Compressive
Strength f'c
(pounds per square inch)
Required Average
Compressive Strength f'cr
(pounds per square inch)
Less than 3,000 f'c + 1,000
3,000 to 5,000 f'c + 1,200
Over 5,000 1.10f'c + 700
3. Pozzolan:
a. Sampling and Testing:
1) Sample and test pozzolan in accordance with ASTM C311. 2) In Computing Water to Cement Ratio and Cement Content per Cubic Yard Of Concrete: Consider cement weight to be weight of portland cement plus 100 percent of weight of fly ash.
4. Aggregate:
a. Testing of concrete aggregate is at CONTRACTOR's expense. b. Sieves:
1) Use sieves with square openings for testing grading of aggregates. 2) Sieve Analyses: If sieve analyses indicate significant change in materials, the ENGINEER may require that new mix design be submitted and accepted before further placing of concrete. c. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 75 and C 136. d. Fine Aggregate:
1) Provide fine aggregate not containing strong alkali nor organic matter which gives color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-14 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 2) Provide aggregate having soundness complying with requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C88.
3) Provide aggregate complying with reactivity requirements of ASTM C33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
e. Coarse Aggregate:
1) Soundness when tested in accordance with ASTM C88: Have loss not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate. 2) Abrasion Loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C131.
3) Reactivity: Not exceed limits specified in Appendix of ASTM C33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C289.
f. Portland Cement:
1) Determination Alkali Content: Determine by method set forth in ASTM C 114.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Encasement Concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete 10 pounds of coloring agent.
B. Joints and Bonding:
1. As far as practicable construct concrete work as monolith.
2. Locations of contraction, construction, expansion, and other joints are indicated on the Drawings or as specified in this Section.
3. For all structures:
1) Provide not less than 14 days between placement of concrete in adjacent concrete wall placements.
2) Place concrete for slabs in checker board pattern with not less than 14 days between placement of concrete in adjacent concrete slab placements.
4. Construction Joints:
a. Where construction joints are not indicated on the Drawings, provide slabs and walls with construction joints at intervals not greater than 30 feet.
Contractor to submit construction joint plan to Engineer for review. b. In order to preserve strength and water tightness of structures, make no other joints, except as authorized the ENGINEER.
c. At construction joints, thoroughly clean concrete of laitance, grease, oil, mud, dirt, curing compounds, mortar droppings, or other objectionable matter by means of heavy sandblasting, and wash surfaces just prior to succeeding concrete placement.
d. At Horizontal Joints: Immediately prior to resuming concrete placing operations, thoroughly spread bed of grout not less than 1/2 inch in thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over horizontal joint surfaces.
5. Keyways in Joints:
a. Provide keyways in joints as indicated on the Drawings. b. Treat lumber keyway material with form release coating, applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
6. Take special care to ensure that concrete is well consolidated around and against waterstops and that waterstops are secured in proper position.
7. Cleaning of Construction Joints:
a. Wash construction joints free of sawdust, chips, and other debris after forms are built and immediately before concrete or grout placement.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-15 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Should formwork confine sawdust, chips, or other loose matter in such manner that it is impossible to remove them by flushing with water, use vacuum cleaner for their removal, after which flush cleaned surfaces with water.
c. Provide cleanout hole at base of each wall and column for inspection and cleaning.
8. Expansion, Contraction, and Construction Joints
a. Constructed where and as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Waterstops, Expansion Joint Material, Synthetic Rubber Sealing Compound, and Other Similar Materials: As specified in Sections 03150 and 07900. c. Expanded metal forms intended to be left in place shall not be used for construction joints.
9. Repair of Concrete: Where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding mortar or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, first coat surface of set concrete with epoxy bonding agent as approved by the Engineer.
C. Conveying and Placing Concrete:
1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which prevent separation or loss of materials.
2. Use equipment for chuting, pumping, and conveying concrete of such size and design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end without separation of materials.
3. Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing concrete that direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying device.
4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and scraping upon completion of any day's placement.
D. Placing Concrete:
1. Place no concrete without prior authorization of the ENGINEER.
2. Do Not Place Concrete Until:
a. Reinforcement is securely and properly fastened in its correct position and loose form ties at construction joints have been retightened. b. Dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, bolts, and any other fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and adequately anchored.
c. Forms have been cleaned and oiled as specified.
3. Placement of concrete in which initial set has occurred, or of retempered concrete, will not be permitted.
4. Place no concrete during rainstorms or high velocity winds.
5. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from coming in contact with such concrete or winds causing excessive drying.
6. Keep sufficient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of concrete.
7. After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except when specific changes are requested and accepted by the ENGINEER.
8. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to place concrete in any portion of the work.
a. Provide this notification in such time in advance of operations as the ENGINEER deems necessary to make final inspection of preparations at location of proposed concrete placing.
b. Place forms, steel, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts in place before notification of readiness is given to the ENGINEER.
c. Depositing Concrete:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-16 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 1) Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid segregation caused by rehandling or flowing.
2) Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and work along forms with vibrator or by other methods.
3) Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater than 5 feet. 4) Use tremies for placing concrete where drop is over 5 feet. 5) Commence placement of concrete on slopes, at bottom of slope.
9. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24 inches in depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms.
10. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous operation, until end of placement is reached.
11. If more than 20 minutes lapse prior to placement of new concrete over concrete previously placed, reduce depth of layers being placed at one time, and/or increase placing equipment, until it is possible to return with placing operation to previously placed concrete within 20 minutes.
12. If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than 20 minutes have elapsed, then spread layer of grout not less than 1/2 inch in thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over surface before placing additional concrete.
13. Placement of Concrete for Slabs, Beams, or Walkways:
a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until concrete in walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink.
b. Allow set time of not less than one hour for shrinkage.
E. Consolidating Concrete:
1. Place concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators.
2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes built into the work.
3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least 18 inches.
4. Vibrators:
a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as placed. b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in serviceable condition. c. Place no concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition.
5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms so as to leave no voids.
6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if for any reason surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, repair such concrete in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
F. Footings and Slabs on Grade:
1. Do not place concrete on ground or compacted fill until subgrade is in moist condition acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2. If necessary, sprinkle subgrade with water not less than 6 nor more than 20 hours in advance of placing concrete.
3. If it becomes dry prior to actual placing of concrete, sprinkle again, without forming pools of water.
4. Place no concrete if subgrade is muddy or soft.
G. Loading Concrete:
1. Green Concrete:
a. No heavy loading of or drilling of epoxy anchors on or in green concrete will be permitted.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-17 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of the specified strength.
2. No backfill shall be placed against concrete walls until the concrete has reached the specified strength and the connecting slabs and beams have been cast and have reached the specified strength.
3. Use construction methods, sequencing, and allow time for concrete to reach adequate strength to prevent overstress of the concrete structure during construction.
H. Curing Concrete:
1. General:
a. Cure concrete by methods specified in this Section.
b. Cure concrete minimum of 7 days.
c. Cure concrete to be painted with water or plastic membrane. d. Do not use curing compound on concrete surfaces that are to receive paint or upon which any material is to be bonded.
e. Water cure or plastic membrane cure concrete slabs which are specified to be sealed by concrete sealer.
f. Cure other concrete by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the CONTRACTOR's option.
g. Floor slabs may be cured using plastic membrane curing.
2. Water Curing:
a. Keep surfaces of concrete being water cured constantly and visibly moist day and night for period of not less than 7 days.
b. Each day forms remain in place may count as 1 day of water curing. c. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has once been broken between concrete surface and forms.
d. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by leaving forms in place.
e. Flood top of walls with water at least 3 times per day, and keep concrete surfaces moist at all times during 7 day curing period.
3. Sprayed Membrane Curing:
a. Apply curing compound to concrete surface after repairing and patching, and within 1 hour after forms are removed.
b. If more than 1 hour elapses after removal of forms, do not use membrane curing compound, but apply water curing for full curing period. c. If surface requires repairing or painting, water cure such concrete surfaces. d. Curing Compound:
1) Do not remove curing compound from concrete in less than 7 days. 2) Curing compound may be removed only upon written request by the CONTRACTOR and acceptance by the ENGINEER, stating what measures are to be performed to adequately cure structures. 3) Take care to apply curing compound in area of construction joints to see that curing compound is placed within construction joint silhouette. 4) Remove curing compound placed within construction joint silhouette by heavy sandblasting prior to placing any new concrete.
5) CONTRACTOR's Option: Instead of using curing compound for curing of construction joints such joints may be water cured.
6) Apply curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer and mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and compound. 7) Apply compound in at least 2 coats.
8) Apply each coat in direction 90 degrees to preceding coat.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-18 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 9) Apply compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has uniform appearance and that natural color is effectively and completely concealed at time of spraying.
10) Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces. 11) Thickness and Coverage of Compound: Provide compound having film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and all points after drying for at least 24 hours.
12) The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that method of applying curing compound specified herein may require more compound than normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also more than is customary in the trade.
13) Apply amounts specified herein, regardless of manufacturer's recommendations or customary practice, if curing compound is used in place of water curing.
14) If the CONTRACTOR desires to use curing compound other than specified compound, coat sample areas of concrete wall with proposed compound and also similar adjacent area with specified compound in specified manner for comparison.
a) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the ENGINEER, in all features, proposed substitution will not be allowed.
15) Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces exposed to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible uniformly over entire surface.
4. Plastic Membrane Curing:
a. Polyethylene film may be used to cure slabs. Seal joints and edges with small sand berm.
b. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be walked on without damage.
c. Keep concrete moist under plastic membrane.
3.02 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide concrete finishes in accordance with Section 03366 and the Concrete Finish Schedule indicated on the Drawings.
B. Edges of Joints:
1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement.
C. Surface Sealant System: Apply as recommended by manufacturer published instructions. Where concrete continues to sweat or leak, apply additional coats of surface sealant until the sweating or leaks stop.
1. Apply Surface Sealant to the Following Surfaces:
a. None.
D. Concrete Sealer:
1. Surfaces to Receive Sealer:
a. Interior and exterior slabs and walls.
b. Interior and exterior concrete slabs and walls in trenches.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-19 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Floors and Slabs to Receive Sealer: Also, as specified in Division 9 on finish schedule.
3. Seal Floors:
a. All Floor Slabs Except for the Following:
1) Those indicated on the Drawings to receive seamless Floor surfacing.
4. Apply Sealant:
a. Apply sealant at coverage rate not to exceed 500 square feet per gallon. b. Apply as soon as slab or floor will bear weight.
c. Sealer:
1) Before applying sealer, sweep entire surface clean with very soft bristled brush which will not mark finish.
2) Apply sealer with large, clean, mop type applicator. 3) Paint rollers are not acceptable.
4) Workmen shall wear flat soled shoes which will not mark or scar surface.
5) Do not allow traffic on floors and slabs until sealer has dried and hardened.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. CONTRACTOR Responsibilities:
1. During progress of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall have tests made to determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with requirements specified.
a. CONTRACTOR shall perform his own quality control testing to satisfy himself materials meet project requirements. CONTRACTOR relies on OWNER test results at his sole risk and is responsible to ensure all materials meet project requirements independent of OWNER's testing.
2. Test slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with requirements of ASTM C143.
a. Furnish test equipment.
b. Do not use concrete that does not meet specification requirements in regards to slump, but remove such concrete from project site.
c. Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so by the ENGINEER.
3. Contractor shall make accommodations for all OWNER testing.
4. Make provisions for and furnish concrete for test specimens, and provide manual assistance to the ENGINEER in preparing said specimens.
5. Assume responsibility for care of and providing of curing conditions for test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.
6. Do not use concrete that does not meet Specification requirements as to air entrainment and shall remove such concrete from project site.
B. Testing by OWNER:
1. Tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C31, ASTM C39, and ASTM C172.
2. The Inspector shall make and deliver test cylinders to the laboratory and testing expense will be borne by the OWNER.
3. Required Number Cylinders as noted below or as set by the Construction Manager:
a. Not less than 5 cylinder specimens, 6 inch diameter by 12 inch long, will be tested for each 150 cubic yards of each class of concrete with minimum of ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-20 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 5 four specimens for each class of concrete placed and not less than 5 specimens for each half day's placement.
b. One cylinder will be broken at 7 days and 2 at 28 days and 1 held in reserve.
4. Air Entraining Admixture:
a. Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified range, and when requested to do so by the ENGINEER.
b. Provide test equipment.
c. Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C173. d. The ENGINEER may at any time test percent of entrained air in concrete received on project site.
C. Enforcement of Strength Requirement:
1. Concrete is expected to reach higher compressive strength than that which is indicated in Table A as specified compressive strength f'c.
2. Strength Level of Concrete: Will be considered acceptable if following conditions are satisfied.
a. Averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results is greater or equal to specified compressive strength f'c.
b. No individual strength test (average of 2 cylinders) falls below specified compressive strength f'c by more than 500 pounds per square inch. c. Whenever one, or both, of 2 conditions stated above is not satisfied, provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and ACI 318 and comply with following requirements:
1) If additional curing does not bring average of 3 cores taken in affected area to at least specified compressive strength f'c, designate such concrete in affected area as defective.
2) The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to strengthen defective concrete by means of additional concrete, additional reinforcing steel, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the CONTRACTOR's expense.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Repair of Defective Concrete:
1. Remove and replace or repair defective work.
2. Correct defective work as specified in this Article.
3. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the ENGINEER.
4. Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified concrete for areas involved.
a. Chip out and key imperfections in the work and make them ready for repair.
5. Dry Pack Method:
a. Dry Pack Method: Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt, and narrow slots cut for repair. b. Smooth Holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before repair.
6. Mortar Method of Replacement: Use for following:
a. Holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete replacement. b. Comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no deeper than reinforcement nearest surface.
7. Concrete Replacement:
a. Use: When holes extend entirely through concrete section or when holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfway or more through the section.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03300-21 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Method of Repair for Surfaces of Set Concrete to be Repaired: First coat with epoxy bonding agent.
8. Acceptable Method of Concrete Repair:
a. Make no repair until the ENGINEER has accepted method of preparing surfaces and proposed method of repair.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03600-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 03600
GROUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete mortar.
2. Grout.
3. Drypack mortar.
4. Nonshrink grout.
5. Epoxy grout.
6. Non-shrink epoxy grout.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03071 - Epoxies.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2 inch or 50 millimeter cube specimens).
2. C531 - Test Method for Liner Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.
3. C579 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings.
4. C827 - Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures.
5. C939 - Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method).
6. C1090 - Test Method for Measuring Change in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic-Cement Grout.
7. C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
8. C1181 - Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Nonshrink Grout and Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data prior to installation.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages or containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's product identification and printed instructions.
B. All materials shall be stored in a cool dry place and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03600-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
C. All materials shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to manufacturer's literature or contact the manufacturer for any special physical or environmental limitations that may be required for use of products.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Non-shrink Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that the non-shrink grout will never go below its initial placement volume when tested in accordance with ASTM C1107.
B. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that non-shrink epoxy grout will show negligible shrinkage or expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Mortar:
1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and water quantity adjusted as required.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: White cement.
B. Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand.
C. Dry-pack Mortar:
1. Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand.
D. Non-shrink Grout:
1. Non-shrink grout shall be a preportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture.
It shall contain no metallic particles such as aluminum powder and no metallic aggregate such as iron filings. It shall require only the addition of potable water.
2. Potable water for pre-soaking, mixing, and curing shall be clean and free of oils, acids, alkalies, organics, and any other deleterious matter.
3. Bleeding: Non-shrink grout shall be free from the emergence of mixing water from within or the presence of water on its surface.
4. Non-shrink grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C1107.
5. Consistency: Non-shrink grout shall remain at a minimum flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes after mixing at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit when tested in accordance with ASTM C230. If at a fluid consistency, it shall be verified in accordance with ASTM C939.
6. Dimensional Stability (height change): Non-shrink grout shall be in accordance with ASTM C1107, volume-adjusting Grade B or C at 45 degrees to 90 degrees. It shall show 90 percent or greater bearing area under bases or baseplates.
7. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink grout shall show minimum compressive strengths at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM C1107 for various periods from the time of placement, including 5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109 as modified by C1107.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03600-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Grout. b. BASF, Shakopee, Minesota, Masterflow 928.
E. Epoxy Grout:
1. Consist of Ready to mix, pre-portioned kit, non-shrink, moisture-tolerant, corrosion and impact resistant, stress and chemical resistant and excellent flowability.
2. Application Life 90 minutes.
3. Flexural Strength (ASTM C-580) 7 day; Flexural Strength (Modulus of Reupture 4000 psi and Tangent Modulus of Elasticity 1.30x106 psi.
4. Tensile Properties (ASTM C-307) 7 day 2,300 psi.
5. Water Absorption (ASTM C-307 7 day (2 hour boil) 0.04%.
6. Bond Strength (ASTM C-882 modified) 7 day 4,200 psi
7. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-579B) 7 day 14,900 psi at 73 degrees F
8. Manufactures: the following or equal:
a. Sika, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur 42 Grout Pack
F. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout:
1. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be a 100 percent solids, premeasured, prepackaged system containing a two-component thermosetting epoxy resin and inert aggregate.
2. Consistency: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall maintain a flowable consistency for at least 45 minutes at 70 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Dimensional Stability (height change):
a. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion (less than 0.0006 in/in) when tested in accordance with ASTM C531.
4. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall show a minimum compressive strength of 10,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours and 14,000 pounds per square inch at 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C579, Method B.
5. Compressive Creep: The compressive creep for non-shrink epoxy grout shall not exceed 0.0027 in/in when tested under a 400 pounds per square inch constant load at 140 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM C1181.
6. Thermal Capability: The coefficient of thermal expansion for non-shrink epoxy grout shall not exceed 0.000018 inches per inch per degree Fahrenheit when tested under ASTM C531, Method B.
7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Epoxy Grout. b. BASF, Shakopee, Minesota, Masterflow 648 CP Plus.
2.02 MIXES
A. Concrete Mortar Mix:
1. Use water-cement ratio that is no more than that specified for concrete being repaired.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of surrounding concrete.
B. Grout Mix:
1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being repaired, with only sufficient water to give required consistency for spreading.
2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no more water used than allowed by water-cement ratio specified for concrete.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03600-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. For Other Applications: Mix in proportions by weight of one part cement to four parts of concrete sand.
C. Dry-pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble to touch after being formed into ball by hand.
D. Non-shrink Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions such that resulting mix has fluid or flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by pouring.
E. Epoxy Grout:
1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for mixing.
2. Ready to mix, pre-portioned kit.
F. Non-shrink Epoxy Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations and all loose material or foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of grout or mortar.
B. Inspect baseplate and anchor systems for rust, oil, and other deleterious substances that may affect the bond or performance of grout.
C. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured sufficiently to attain its design strength and limit further shrinkage.
D. Verify that temperature of cementitious or epoxy grout does not exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Roughen all concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, chipping, or other mechanical means to assure bond. Loose or broken concrete shall be removed.
2. All grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious materials that may affect bond that were identified in the inspection process shall be completely removed from concrete and bottoms of baseplates. All metal surfaces should have a 2 to 3 mil peak-to-valley profile for epoxy grouts.
3. For cementitious mortars and grouts, concrete surfaces shall be saturated surface dry. Any standing water shall be removed prior to placing grouts.
4. For epoxy grouts, do not wet concrete surfaces with water. Instead, where required, wet surfaces with epoxy for horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical or overhead work prior to placing epoxy grouts.
B. Forms and Headboxes for Grouts (Cementitious or Epoxy):
1. Forms for grouts shall be built of material with adequate strength to withstand the placement of grouts.
2. Forms must be rigid and liquid tight. All cracks and joints shall be caulked with an elastomeric sealant. All forms shall be lined with polyethylene for easy grout ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03600-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
release. Forms carefully waxed with two coats of heavy-duty paste wax shall also be acceptable.
3. Forms shall be 4 to 6 inches higher than the baseplate on one side of the baseplate configuration when using head pressure for placement.
4. A sufficient number of headboxes shall be built to facilitate placement of grouts.
5. Air relief holes a minimum 1/8 inch in diameter shall be provided when required by a baseplate configuration to avoid entrapping air underneath.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Cement Mortar and Grout:
1. For Defective Concrete Repair:
a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete. b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and similar type items.
2. Concrete Surfaces:
a. Apply epoxy bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surfaces before placing mortar or grout.
3. Placing:
a. Exercise particular care in placing Portland cement mortar or grout since they are required to furnish structural strength or impermeable water seal or both. b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that has not been placed within 30 minutes after mixing.
B. Epoxy Grout:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 PLACEMENT
A. Grout shall only be installed after the final equipment alignment is correct and reviewed and accepted by the Engineer.
1. Grouts shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. A mortar mixer with moving paddles shall be used for mixing grouts. For cementitious grouts, pre-wet the mixer and empty out excess water before beginning mixing.
3. Cementitious Grouts:
a. Non-shrink cementitious grout shall be added to a premeasured amount of water that does not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content.
b. Mix cementitious grouts per manufacturer's instructions for uniform consistency.
c. Grouts may be drypacked, flowed, or pumped into place. All baseplate grouting shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other to avoid trapping air. Do not overwork grouts.
d. Do not retemper grout by adding more water after stiffening. e. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of the grout in the headbox above the bottom of the baseplate. The headbox should be filled to the maximum level and the grout worked down to top of baseplate.
4. Epoxy Grouts:
a. Mix the resin (A+B) with a low speed drill for 20-30 seconds. Insure that air is not entrapped during mixing.
b. Slowly add the C component to the mixed resin and mix for 3-5 minutes. c. Drum mixer/mortar mixer or other appropriately sized mixers can be used for ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 03600-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.5 cu. ft. packaging.
d. Once mixed, pour the material into the desired place, within the application life of the material.
3.05 CURING
A. Cementitious Grouts:
1. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching initial set.
Provide a 45 degree angle cut back.
2. Clean equipment and tools as recommended by the grout manufacturer.
3. Cure Grouts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Keep grout moist for a minimum of 3 days. The method needed to protect grouts will depend on temperature, humidity, and wind. Wet burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding and, in extreme conditions, a combination of methods shall be employed.
4. Grouts shall be maintained above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until they have attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch or above 70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from subsequent freezing.
B. Epoxy Grouts:
1. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and recommendations. Do not wet cure epoxy grouts.
2. Consult the manufacturer for appropriate cure schedule. In no case should any surface in contact with grout be allowed to fall below 50 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement.
3. Equipment and tools shall be cleaned immediately with a strong liquid detergent and water solution before grout hardens.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor responsibilities:
1. Contractor is responsible to perform his own testing to ensure grout meets specification requirements. Contractor relies on testing results from Owner or Owner firm at his sole risk.
2. Make accommodations for any Owner directed testing.
B. Owner Responsibilities:
1. Owner may take samples and perform grout testing, including the following. a. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C109.
b. Non-shrink grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C579 (Method B).
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal fabrications including:
1. Ladders.
2. Stairs.
3. Handrails and guardrails.
4. Metal grating.
5. Aluminum stair nosing.
6. Aluminum stair tread.
7. Manhole frame and cover.
8. Stop plank grooves.
9. Miscellaneous aluminum.
10. Miscellaneous cast iron.
11. Miscellaneous stainless steel.
12. Miscellaneous structural steel.
13. Associated accessories to the above items.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
2. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
3. Section 15061 - Pipe Supports.
4. Section 15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. 2019 California Building Code (CBC)
B. Aluminum Association (AA):
1. Specification M32-C22-A41 - Aluminum Finishes.
C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A36/A36M - Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A48 - Specification for Grey Iron Castings.
3. A53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
4. A123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
5. A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
6. A269 - Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
7. A276 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.
8. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 per square inch Tensile.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
9. A325 - Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
10. A489 - Specification for Carbon Steel Eyebolts.
11. A490 - Specification for Heat-Treated, Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Tensile Strength.
12. A500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
13. A501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
14. A569 - Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
15. A570/A570M - Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality.
16. A572 – Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.
17. A635/A635M - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy Thickness Coils Carbon, Hot-Rolled.
18. A653/A653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-iron Alloy-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
19. A992 -Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
20. B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
21. B429 - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extended Structural Pipe and Tube.
22. B782 - Standard Specification for Iron Graphite Sintered Bearings (OilImpregnated).
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Responsibility:
1. The Contractor providing the grating, handrail, guardrail, stairs, ladders, shall be considered the designer of the system. Typical details included on the contract documents are for general minimum standard for style, size, and materials and shall be used as a guide for the contractor in designing the specific system utilized on the project.
2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system.
4. Seismic Design Criteria: As specified in Section 01612 for all systems utilized for the project, including any typical details included on the contract documents that are actually utilized.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for handrails and guardrails, including details on connection attachments, gates, kickplates, and angles.
1. Submittal for stairs, ladders, handrails and guardrails shall include design calculations stamped and signed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in the State of California. The calculations shall include design for rails, post, brackets, concrete anchorage and all other component assemblies. Design shall be in accordance to the 2019 CBC.
B. Samples: Guardrails with specified finishes.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Design Data:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Test Reports:
a. Gratings:
1) Grating manufacturers' calculations showing that gratings will meet specified load-bearing and deflection requirements for each size grating for each span.
2) Reports of tests performed under Article 2.03 herein. b. Planks:
1) Plank manufacturers' calculations showing that planks will meet specified load-bearing and deflection requirements for each size plank for each span.
2) Reports of tests performed under Article 2.03 herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, structural and miscellaneous metals shall conform with the standards of the ASTM, including the following:
Item ASTM
Standard No.
Class, Grade
Type or Alloy No.
Cast Iron
Cast Iron A48 Class 40B
Steel
Galvanized sheet iron or steel 653 Coating G90
Black steel, sheet or strip A569
A570
--
Coil (plate) A635 --
Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, and
miscellaneous items
A36 --
Standard bolts, nuts, and washers A307 --
High strength bolts, nuts, and hardened flat
washers
A325
A490
--
Eyebolts A489 Type 1
Tubing, cold-formed A500 Grade B
Tubing, hot-formed A501 --
Steel pipe A53 Grade B
High-Strength Plates A572
Rolled W and WT Shapes A992
Stainless steel
Plate, sheet and strip A167 Type 304 or 316*
Bars and shapes A276 Type 304 or 316*
Aluminum
Sheet aluminum-flashing B209 Alloy 5005-H14,
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set Item ASTM
Standard No.
Class, Grade
Type or Alloy No.
0.032 inches minimum
thickness
Sheet aluminum-structural B209 Alloy 6061-T6
Structural aluminum B308
B209
Alloy 6061-T6
Extruded aluminum B221 Alloy 6063-T42
* Use Type 304L or Type 316L if material will be welded.
B. Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM.
C. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.
2.02 LADDERS
A. General:
1. Type: Safety type conforming to local, State, and Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards as minimum. Furnish guards for ladder wells.
2. Size: 18 inches wide between side rails of length, size, shape, detail, and location indicated on the Drawings.
B. Aluminum Ladders:
1. Materials and Fabrication: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy of welded construction.
2. Rungs:
a. One inch minimum square bar with 1/8 inch grooves in top and deeply serrated on all sides.
b. Capable of withstanding 1,000 pound load without failure.
3. Side Rails: Minimum 3 inches by 3/8 inch flat bars.
4. Fabrication:
a. Welded construction, of size, shape, location, and details indicated on the Drawings.
b. For ladders over 20 feet high, furnish standard ladder cages or fall prevention system designed in accordance with State and Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements.
c. Fall Prevention System: Include but not limit to railing, brackets, clamps, 2 sleeves, and 2 belts satisfying Occupational Safety and Health Administration safe climbing requirements. One of the following or equal:
1) North Consumer Products, Saf-T-Climb.
2) Swager Communications, Climbers Buddy System.
2.03 STAIRS
A. Aluminum:
1. Stringers: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.
2. Stair Treads:
a. Aluminum of same type specified under Aluminum Grating. b. Of sizes indicated on the Drawings, and 1-3/4 inch minimum depth with cast abrasive type safety nosings.
c. Provide a vertical close piese between each riser. Fabricate, install, and fasten close pieces as indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. Handrails and Guardrails: Aluminum pipe specified under Aluminum Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe).
4. Fasteners: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
2.04 HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS
A. General: Design and fabricate assemblies to conform to current local, State, and Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards and requirements.
B. Aluminum Handrails and Guardrails (Nonwelded Pipe):
1. Rails, Posts, and Fitting-assembly Spacers:
a. ASTM B429, 6063-T5 or T6, minimum Schedule 40, extruded aluminum pipe of minimum 1.89 inch outside diameter and 0.14-inch wall thickness. b. Alloy 6063-T6 may be used for pieces requiring bending only.
2. Kick Plates: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.
3. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the manufacturer.
4. Other Parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum castings. a. Fabrications: ASTM B209 or ASTM B221 extruded bars.
1) Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy.
b. Plug Screws or Blind Rivets: Type 305 stainless steel. c. Other Parts: Type 300 series stainless steel.
5. Finish of Aluminum Components:
a. Anodized finish, 0.7 mil thick, applied to exposed surfaces after cutting.
Aluminum Association Specification M32-C22-A41, mechanical finish-medium satin, chemical finish-medium matte, anodic coating-clear Class I Architectural.
b. Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before anodizing.
6. Fabrication and Assembly:
a. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.
b. Perform without welding.
c. Do not epoxy bond the parts.
d. Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as indicated on the Drawings.
7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail.
b. Julius Blum and Company, Inc., Connectorail.
c. Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail.
C. Picket Railing: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Reynolds Metals Company, Architectural and Building Products Division No. 05- 733.
2. Julius Blum and Company, equivalent product.
3. Craneveyor Corporation, equivalent product.
D. Steel Pipe Handrails and Guardrails:
1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe of minimum 1.9 inch outside diameter, or larger where indicated on the Drawings.
2. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.
3. Kick Plates: Galvanized steel.
4. Attachment Devices: Provide clip angles and other fasteners necessary for securing handrails and guardrails to other construction as indicated on the Drawings.
5. Continuously weld joints and grind smooth.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
6. Bend rails to profile indicated on the Drawings, without sharp bends or flat spots.
Rails shall be round after bending.
7. Neatly weld intersection of rails and posts, and grind surfaces smooth.
E. Stainless Steel Pipe Handrails and Guardrails:
1. General: Prefabricated shop-assembled type, field welded type, or mechanically joined type. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. R & B Wagner, Inc.
b. Julius Blum and Company.
2. Materials: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel posts, rails, brackets, and accessory parts.
a. Railings and Posts: Nominal 1-1/2 inch, Schedule 5 pipe with minimum
1.900 inch outer diameter and 0.065 inch wall thickness. b. Post Insert Reinforcing for All Posts: 1.750 inch outside diameter pipe, of
0.083 inch wall thickness, and 26 inches long.
c. Fasteners, Connection Plates, Splice Bars, and Fittings: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
d. Stainless Steel Finish: Number 4 NAAMM finish.
3. Fabrication:
a. Fabricate guardrails and posts to be in same plane.
b. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.
c. Make handrail and guardrail sections between splices 20 feet maximum. d. Form bends in pipe without use of fittings where practical. Form with internal mandrels on power benders.
e. Where handrail and guardrail are welded, make intersections and joints with continuous 360 degree welds and grind welds smooth.
f. Where handrail and guardrail are mechanically joined, make joints with mechanical connections utilizing stainless steel machine screws with lock washers and threaded tubular rivets.
g. Following fabrication, pickle and passivate pipe, spools, fittings, and other shop fabricated pieces by immersion in sulfuric acid solution followed by immersion in a nitric-hydrofluoric bath and subsequent wash at the proper temperature and length of time to remove free iron, weld scale, and other impurities, and to obtain a passive finished surface.
F. Guardrail Gates:
1. Supplied by guardrail manufacturer:
a. Of same material, quality, and workmanship as specified for guardrail system in which they will be installed.
b. Of design similar to that of handrail or railing system in which they will be installed.
2. Components: Gate frame, stainless steel self-closing device, hinges, gate stops, and durable self-locking type latch. Fabricate components in conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration minimum strength requirements.
G. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by guardrail manufacturer for use with this system.
2.05 METAL GRATINGS
A. General:
1. Fabricate grating to cover areas indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, grating over an opening shall cover entire opening.
3. Make cutouts in grating where required for equipment access or protrusion, including valve operators or stems, and gate frames.
4. Band ends of grating and edges of cutouts in grating. a. End Banding: 1/4 inch less than height of grating, with top of grating and top edge of banding flush.
b. Cutout Banding: Full-height of grating.
c. Use banding of same material as grating.
d. Panel Layout: Enable installation and subsequent removal of grating around protrusions or piping.
e. Openings 6 Inches and larger: Lay out grating panels with edges of 2 adjacent panels located on centerline of opening.
f. Openings smaller than 6 Inches: Locate opening at edge of single panel. g. Where an area requires more than 1 grating section to cover area, clamp adjacent grating sections together at 1/4 points with fasteners acceptable to ENGINEER.
h. Fabricate grating in units of maximum 50 pounds each.
5. When requested by ENGINEER, test 1 section of each size grating for each span length involved on the job under full load.
a. Furnish a suitable dial gauge for measuring deflections.
6. Grating shall be aluminum, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Aluminum Grating:
1. Material for Gratings, Shelf Angles, and Rebates: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, except cross bars may be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.
2. Material for Shelf Angle Concrete Anchors: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Material for Grating Rebate Rod Anchors: 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.
4. Fabrication:
a. Bar Size and Spacing: As determined by manufacturer to enable grating to support 180 pounds per square foot uniform live load on entire grating area, using an extreme fiber stress of 12,000 pounds per square inch maximum. b. Maximum Deflection Under Specified Loading: 1/240 of grating clear span maximum.
c. Spacing of Main Grating Bars: Maximum of 1-1/8 inches clear between bars. d. Minimum Grating Height: 2 inches.
e. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) IKG Borden Industries, grooved Galok Aluminum I-Bar. 2) Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., grooved I-Bar.
C. Aluminum Grating Planks:
1. Materials: Meet requirements previously specified for aluminum grating.
2. Fabrication:
a. Meet requirements previously specified for aluminum grating. b. Have unpunched surface with cross hatched anti-skid surface. c. Minimum weight of 3-1/4 pounds per square foot.
d. Provide 1 inch diameter hole with smooth edges at each end for each plank. e. Furnish planks in 3 foot widths.
f. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Reynolds Aluminum Company, Model PHEX-325.
2) IKG, Aluminum Lock-Plank.
D. Steel Gratings:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-8 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
2. Of bar size and spacing that, as determined by the manufacturer to enable grating to support a uniform live load of 180 pounds per square foot on the entire area of the grating, using an extreme fiber stress of not more than 18,000 pounds per square inch.
3. Maximum Deflection Under Loading: 1/240 of grating clear span.
4. Bar Spacing: Maximum of 1-1/8 inches clear between bars.
5. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. IKG Borden Industries, IKG Weldforged.
b. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., Type 19W4.
E. Heavy-Duty Grating (exterior trenches):
1. Heavy-duty type, fabricated from structural steel and designed in accordance with AASHTO specifications, using H-10 loading.
2. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123.
3. Trenches 6’-6” across: Use 4” 4x3/8 W-15-4.
4. Trenches 5’-6” across: Use 4”x5/8 W-19-4.
5. Provided tabs with threaded holes as indicated on the drawings for tread plate hold downs.
6. Provided 3/16 hot dipped galvanized steel tread plate with hold down bolt tabs over grating as indicated on the drawings.
7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Grating Pacific
2.06 ALUMINUM STAIR NOSING
A. Material: Aluminum abrasive cast nosings with aluminum oxide granules integrally cast into metal, forming permanent, nonslip, long-wearing surface.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Wooster Products, Inc., Type 101 Stair Tread.
2. American Abrasive Metals Company, Type A Stair Treads.
2.07 ALUMINUM STAIR TREAD
A. Four inches wide, fabricated with integrally cast anchors. Length to extend within 3 inches of stair edges.
B. Bolts, Where Required: Type 316 stainless steel.
2.08 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Material: Gray iron castings, ASTM A48, Class 30-B.
B. Match City Standard: Pinkerton or approved equal. See City Standard Detail S-4.
1. Frame Part No. A-625
2. Cover Part No. A-103
3. Stamped "Sewer"
C. Type: Heavy-duty traffic type, with combined set weight of minimum 265 pounds.
D. Machine horizontal and vertical bearing surfaces to fit neatly, with easily removable cover bearing firmly in frame without rocking.
E. Frame:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-9 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Bottom flange type.
2. Approximately 4-1/2 inches frame height.
3. 24 inches diameter clear inside dimension, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
4. Approximately 32 inches bottom flange outside diameter.
F. Cover:
1. Skid-resistant grid pattern design stamped with name of utility service provided by manhole, such as "ELECTRICAL," "SEWER," "TELEPHONE," or "WATER."
2. Solid type without ventilation holes.
G. Finish: Unpainted.
2.09 CAST IRON STOP PLANK GROOVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Neenah Foundry Company, R-7500 Series, Type A.
2. McKinley Iron Works, Type L.
B. Size: 2 inch wide groove opening by 1-1/2 inch deep, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Recess groove with the cast iron surface of the groove set flush with the concrete surface.
2.10 CONCRETE INSERTS
A. Concrete inserts for supporting pipe and other applications are specified in Section 15061, 15062, and elsewhere.
2.11 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Preformed channel pipe supports for pipe supports and other applications are specified in Section 15062.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM
A. General: Fabricate aluminum products, not covered separately herein, in accordance with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting. Do not weld or flame cut.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS CAST IRON
A. General:
1. Tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts.
2. Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular edge of casting without flaking metal.
3. Before leaving the foundry, clean castings and apply 16 mil dry film thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.14 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-10 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set A. Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified herein as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
B. Following fabrication, pickle and passivate shop fabricated pieces by immersion in sulfuric acid solution followed by immersion in a nitric-hydrofluoric bath and subsequent wash at the proper temperature and length of time to remove free iron, weld scale, and other impurities, and to obtain a passive finished surface.
2.15 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified herein as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
B. Where STRUCTURAL PRODUCTS, as defined in the AISC Steel Construction Manual, are called out they shall be fabricated by means of hot rolled, extruded, prequalified Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds (CJP) or Laser-Fusion. Shape dimensions (height and width) must match what is shown in the AISC Steel Construction Manual. Shape section properties (moment of inertia {I}, section modulus {S}, etc.) must match or exceed those shown in the AISC Steel Construction Manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to receive the work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin this work until such conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions, as applicable except where specified otherwise.
3.03 STAIRS
A. General: Install guard railings around stair wells as indicated on the Drawings or specified.
3.04 LADDERS
A. Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8 inches between supporting surface and center of rungs.
B. Where exit from ladder is forward over top rung, extend side rails 3 feet 3 inches minimum above landing, and return the rails with a radius bend to the landing.
C. Where exit from ladder is to side, extend ladder 5 feet 6 inches minimum above landing and rigidly secure at top.
D. Erect rail straight, level, plumb, and true to position indicated on the Drawings. Correct deviations from true line or grade which are visible to the eye.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-11 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.05 ALUMINUM HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL
A. Fasten pipe rails to fittings with Series 300 stainless steel pop rivets or flush set screws.
B. Make pipe cuts clean and straight, free of burrs and nicks, and square and accurate for minimum joint-gap.
C. Drill and countersink holes to proper size, as required for a tight flush fit of screws and other component parts.
D. Space attachment brackets as indicated in the manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 GUARDRAIL GATES
A. Install gate to be a vertical plane with the guardrail when in the closed position.
B. Install hinges so that each gate can swing 180 degrees from the closed position to the fully open position.
C. Install so that the gates swing to the walkway side of the guardrail only. Install gate stops on the stationary railing posts to prohibit gates from swinging in the wrong direction.
D. Install gate frames, hinges, stops, and latches in conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration minimum strength requirements.
3.07 ALUMINUM AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS A. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of handrails and guardrails covered with
0.4 millimeters, minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film.
B. Do not remove protective film before handrails and guardrails have been accepted by ENGINEER nor before other work in proximity of handrails and guardrails has been completed.
C. Discontinue handrails and guardrails at lighting fixtures.
D. Provide 1/8 inch diameter weep hole at base of each post.
E. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials electrolysis, make application such that none of the protective material is visible in the completed assembly.
F. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings.
G. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into core drilled holes in concrete, into stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to face of concrete surfaces; as specified and indicated on the Drawings.
H. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-12 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set I. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kickplates and rails. Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the Drawings.
J. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous.
K. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced lengths to 3 posts minimum.
L. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver.
M. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in manufacturer's installation instructions.
N. Completed installation shall have handrails and railings rigid and free of play at joints and attachments.
O. Protect handrail and guardrail finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains, and other damage.
P. Replace damaged or disfigured handrails and guardrails with new.
Q. Shortly before final acceptance of the work, and after removal of protective polyethylene film, clean handrails and guardrails with mild detergent or with soap and water.
R. After cleaning, thoroughly rinse handrails and guardrails and wipe with soft cloth.
S. Erect guardrail straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated on the Drawings. Correct deviations from true line of grade which are visible to the eye.
3.08 STEEL PIPE GUARDRAIL
A. Anchor posts into concrete by grouting posts into galvanized steel sleeves embedded in concrete or into core drilled holes in concrete as indicated on the Drawings. Do not cut reinforcing bars in concrete. Where required to fasten guardrail to other construction, fasten as indicated on the Drawings.
3.09 GRATING
A. Coat surfaces of aluminum shelf angles, rebates, and rod anchors in contact with concrete as specified in Section 09960.
B. Aluminum Grating: Support on aluminum shelf angles.
C. Aluminum Grating Planks: Support and install planks as specified for aluminum grating.
D. Steel Grating: Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel shelf angles.
E. Heavy-duty Steel Grating:
1. Support on hot-dip galvanized structural steel shelf angles embedded and anchored in concrete.
2. Use for roadways, traffic areas, and where indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 05500-13 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set F. Allow 1/8 inch maximum clearance between ends of grating and inside face of vertical leg of shelf angles.
G. Horizontal bearing leg of shelf angles shall be 2 inches minimum.
H. Install aluminum plate or angles where necessary to fill openings at changes in elevation and at openings between equipment and grating.
I. Install angle stops at ends of grating.
J. Installed grating shall not slide out of rebate or off support.
K. Weld stops in place, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
L. Top surfaces of grating sections adjacent to each other shall lie in same plane.
M. Recess stop plank grooves with cast iron surfaces of groove set flush with concrete surface.
3.10 STAIR NOSINGS
A. Install stair nosings on treads of concrete stairs, including top tread on upper slab.
B. Cast stair nosings in fresh concrete, flush with tread and riser faces.
3.11 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
A. Set manhole covers flush with paving. Where no paving exists, set manhole cover 6 inches above surrounding grade.
3.12 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Space as indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 09960
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Field applied high performance coatings for all surfaces listed in Section 09960-3.15. All other surfaces shall be coated in accordance with Section 09910.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01312 - Project Meetings.
2. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 01352 - Alteration Project Procedures.
4. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
5. Section 09910 - Paints: Painting for normal exposures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
B. Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC):
1. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.
2. SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
3. SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
4. SP-5 - White Blast Cleaning.
5. SP-6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
6. SP-7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
7. SP-10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
C. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL):
1. 3P83 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Submerged Metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls which will contain water even when above expected water level.
B. Submerged Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Surfaces which are or will be:
1. Underwater.
2. In structures which normally contain water.
3. Below tops of walls of water containing structures.
C. Dry Film Thickness: Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils.
D. Volatile Organic Compound: As defined in Section 09910.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coating materials for concrete and metal surfaces shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater treatment plants.
B. Coating for final coats shall be fume resistant, compounded with pigment suitable for exposure to sewage gases, especially to hydrogen sulfide and to carbon dioxide.
C. Pigments shall be materials that do not darken, discolor, or fade due to action of sewage gases.
D. Coating materials used in conjunction with potable water supply systems shall be certified to NSF 61 or UL 3P83.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit as specified in Sections 01330 and 09910 B. Product Data: Submit as specified in Sections 01330 and 09910
1. Regulatory Requirements: Include requirements concerning the following a. Volatile organic compound limitations.
b. Coatings containing lead compounds.
c. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal. d. NSF or UL certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems.
C. Samples: Submit as specified in Sections 01330 and 09910 D. Certificates: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data and as specified in Section 09910
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit for ENGINEER's record only.
G. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit as specified in Section 01770
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Applicator:
1. Minimum of 5 years experience applying specified type or types of coatings under conditions similar to those of the Work.
2. Manufacturer approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator program.
3. Approved and licensed by polymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply polymorphic polyester resin coating system.
4. Applicator of off-site application of coal tar epoxy shall have successfully applied coal tar epoxy on similar surfaces in material, size, and complexity as on the Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing agencies regulations by using coatings that do not exceed permissible volatile organic compound limits and do not contain lead.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
C. Certification: Certify that applicable pigments are resistant to discoloration or deterioration when exposed to hydrogen sulfide and other sewage gases and product data fails to designate coating as "fume resistant".
D. Field Samples: Prepare and coat a minimum 100 square foot area between corners or limits such as control or construction joints of each system. Approved field sample may be part of Work.
E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct as specified in Section 01312 F. Compatibility of Coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: As specified in Section 09910
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and Schedule: As specified in Section 01352
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide as specified in Section 09910 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Special Coatings: One of the following or equal:
1. Ameron: Ameron Protective Coatings Division, Brea, CA.
2. Carboline: Carboline, St. Louis, MO.
3. Cook: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH.
4. Devoe: Devoe Coatings, Louisville, KY.
5. IET: Integrated Environmental Technologies, Santa Barbara, CA.
6. International: International Protective Coatings, Houston, TX.
7. Keeler: Keeler & Long Inc., Watertown, CT.
8. Kop-Coat: Carboline, St. Louis, MO.
9. PPC:: Polymorphic Polymers Corp., N. Miami, FL.
10. Sanchem: Sanchem, Chicago, IL.
11. S-W: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH.
12. Tnemec: Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO.
13. Madwell Products Corporation, Alpharetta, Georgia
2.02 PREPARATION AND PRETREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Metal Pretreatment: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Ameron: Galvaprep.
2. Devoe: Vy-Kote 443.
3. International: Galvaprep 5 or Alumiprep 33.
4. Kop-Coat: No. 40 Metal Conditioner.
5. S-W: P60G2, Wash Primer.
6. Tnemec: Tneme-Grip 32-1210.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Surface Cleaner and Degreaser: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Devoe: Devprep 88.
2.03 COATING MATERIALS
A. Alkali Resistant Bitumastic: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Kop-Coat: Bitumastic Super Service Black
2. International: Intertuf 100.
3. Tnemec: 449, Heavy Duty Black.
B. Wax Coating: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Sanchem: No-Ox-Id A special.
C. High Solids Epoxy Primer (Not less than 80 Percent Solids by Volume): As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Ameron: Amerlock 400.
2. Devoe: Bar Rust 233H.
3. International: Intergard 750 HS.
4. Kop Coat: Super Hi-Gard.
5. Tnemec: Series 104 H.S. Epoxy.
D. High Solids Epoxy (Not less than 80 Percent Solids by Volume): As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Ameron: Amerlock 400.
2. Devoe: Bar Rust 233H.
3. International: Intergard 565HS.
4. Kop Coat Super Hi-Gard..Tnemec: Series 135 Chembuild.
E. Aliphatic or Aliphatic-acrylic Polyurethane: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Ameron: Amercoat 450HS.
2. Devoe: Devthane 379
3. International: Interthane 990 HS.
4. Kop Coat: 134, High Solids Carboline.
5. Tnemec: Series 75, Semi-Gloss Endura-Shield.
F. Polymorphic Polyester Resin Coating System: Two component, modified styrene based thermoset resin, EPA approved for potable water, with 100 percent solids and maximum 10 grams per liter volatile organic compounds. Final coat color as selected by ENGINEER. As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. IET: IET Prime Coat DS-101, Intermediate Coat DS-301, and Finish Coat DS-401.
2. PPC: PPC Prime Coat, IC-Filler Coat, and FC-Final Coat.
G. Asphalt Varnish: AWWA C 500.
H. Protective Coal Tar: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Kop-Coat: Bitumastic No. 50.
2. S-W: Cooper Black, No. 750.
3. Tapecoat Co.: T.C. Mastic.
I. Coal Tar Epoxy: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Ameron: 78HB.
2. International: Intertuf 708 HS.
3. Kop-Coat: 300-M, Bitumastic.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
4. S-W: B69B40/B60V40, Hi-Mil Sher-Tar.
5. Tnemec: Series 60.
J. Concrete Restoration With 100% Epoxy Coating the following no equal:
1. Concrete repair material: Madwell Mainstay ML-72
2. 100% Epoxy material: Madwell Mainstay DS-4.
K. Hydro-POX 204 UHB, no Equal:
1. 100% Solids, 2 component, 1:1 By volume Epoxy Liner System
2. Hydro-POX 204 UHB
2.04 MIXES
A. Mix epoxy parts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix coal tar epoxy in containers furnished by manufacturer for mixing purposes. Mix unit quantities only. Use power mixer for minimum time recommended by manufacturer. Do not include time during pouring or stirring in mixing time.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions, unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Specification.
B. Protect following surfaces from abrasive blasting as specified in Section 09910, by masking, or other means:
1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems.
2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact.
3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets.
4. Surfaces of Shafting on which sprockets are to fit.
5. Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit.
6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including those slide gates.
7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting.
8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.
C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entering sand or dust.
D. Concrete: Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, fins, loose concrete particles, form release materials, oil, and grease. Fill voids so that surface is smooth. Etch or brush off-blast clean (SSPC SP-7) as recommended by coating manufacturer.
E. Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP-1.
2. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2 through SP-10.
3. Abrasive blast surfaces prior to coating.
4. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration.
5. When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast surfaces before touching-up.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
F. Ferrous Metal Surfaces Not to be Submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP-6, unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, prohibited or specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-3.
G. Ferrous Metal Surfaces to be Submerged: Unless specified otherwise, abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP-10 or better to clean and provide roughened surface profile of not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
H. Sherardized, Aluminum, Copper, and Bronze Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions.
I. Galvanized Surface:
1. Degrease or solvent clean to remove oily residue.
2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast.
3. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels.
J. Shop Primed Metal:
1. Remove shop primer from metal to be submerged by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10, unless greater degree of surface preparation is required by manufacturer of coating system.
2. Correct abraded, scratched or otherwise damaged areas of shop prime coat by sanding or abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-6.
3. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively, or when recommended bycoating manufacturer, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
4. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
5. When prime coat not authorized by ENGINEER is applied, remove unauthorized prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
6. Shop Applied Bituminous Paint (Asphalt Varnish): Abrasive blast clean shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish from surfaces scheduled to receive non-bituminous coatings.
K. Abrasive blast cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners in same manner as unprotected metal when used in assembly of equipment designated for abrasive blasting.
L. Abrasive blast components to be attached to surfaces which cannot be abrasive blasted before components are attached.
M. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/8 inch radius.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.02 GENERAL PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop cloths and other coverings.
1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.
3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coat metal unless specified otherwise.
C. Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard.
D. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating.
E. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer.
F. Prime shop primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop primed surfaces before applying primer over entire surface.
G. Apply minimum number of specified coats.
H. Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners.
I. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses.
J. Coat surfaces without drops, ridges, waves, holidays, laps, or brush marks.
K. Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating.
L. When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and intermediate coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat.
M. Dust coatings between coats. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high gloss finishes, unless instructed otherwise by coating manufacturer.
N. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray, unless particular method of application is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these Specifications.
O. Spray Application:
1. When using spray application, apply coating to thickness not greater than that suggested in coating manufacturer's instructions for brush coat application.
2. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is required by coating manufacturer's instruction or these Specifications.
3. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist or spray.
P. Drying and Recoating:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-8 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating manufacturer's instructions.
2. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure which may impair bond between coats.
3. Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by epoxy manufacturer.
4. When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast coat prior to applying another coat.
5. When limitation on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be met before attachment of components to surfaces which cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment.
6. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.
7. Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.
8. Leave no holidays.
9. Sand and recoat scratched, contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating surfaces so damages are invisible to naked eye.
3.04 ALKALI RESISTANT BITUMASTIC
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements.
B. Application:
1. Apply in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
a. Apply at least 2 coats, 8 to 14 mils dry film thickness each.
3.05 WAX COATING
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements.
B. Application:
1. Apply in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
a. Apply at least 1/32 inch thick coat with 2 inch or shorter bristle brush. b. Thoroughly rub coating into metal surface with canvas covered wood block or canvas glove.
3.06 HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY SYSTEM
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows:
a. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP-10 prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-10. b. Abrasive blast non-submerged ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in accordance with SSPC SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
a. Apply minimum 2 coat system with total dry film thickness of 10 mils.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-9 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
b. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
c. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain acceptable finish and to prevent damage to other surfaces. d. Coat entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, and other metal devices bolted to concrete.
e. Coat surface of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed when embedded in concrete or masonry.
3.07 EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows:
a. Prepare concrete surfaces as for coal tar epoxy.
b. Touch up shop primed steel and miscellaneous iron.
c. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning, prior to coating.
When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP-6.
d. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool clean galvanized metal surfaces.
e. Lightly abrasive blast or sand fiberglass and plastic to be coated to roughen surfaces prior to coating.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
2. Apply 3 coat system consisting of:
a. Primer: 4 to 5 mils dry film thickness high solids epoxy primer, b. Intermediate Coat: 4 to 5 mils dry film thickness high solids epoxy intermediate coat, and
c. Top Coat: 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry film thickness aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic polyurethane topcoat.
3. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within 30 days or within time limits recommended by manufacturer, whichever is shorter. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08 POLYMORPHIC POLYESTER RESIN SYSTEM
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows:
2. Prepare concrete to obtain clean, open pore with exposed aggregate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Prepare ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-5, White Metal Finish, with coating manufacturer's recommended anchor pattern.
4. Complete abrasive blast cleaning within 6 hours of applying prime coat. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-5.
5. When handling steel, wear gloves to prevent hand-printing.
6. Adjust pH of concrete to within 5.5 to 8.0 before applying prime coat.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-10 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
2. Apply minimum dry film thickness system consisting of primer, tie coat and top coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as follows:
a. Steel: 35 mils.
b. Concrete: 45 mils.
3.09 ASPHALT VARNISH
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
a. Apply minimum 2 coats.
3.10 PROTECTIVE COAL TAR
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation coal tar requirements.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
a. Apply minimum 20 mils dry film thickness coating.
3.11 COAL TAR EPOXY
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows:
a. Abrasive blast iron or steel surfaces to be coated as submerged metal in accordance with SSPC SP-5. Prepare other metal surfaces to be coated with coal tar epoxy in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as follows:
a. Apply two 8 mils dry film thickness coats.
b. Apply coal tar epoxy on blasted steel on same day that steel is blasted. c. Apply succeeding coats over previous coat as soon as application does not cause sagging, within the following times, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer, whichever is sooner.
Average Temperature
(Degrees Fahrenheit)
Maximum Time Between Coats
(Hours)
50 to 60 36
60 to 70 24
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-11 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
70 to 80 12
80 to 120 4
d. Apply additional coats required to obtain specified thickness. e. When previous coat has cured or set or Maximum Time Between Coats has lapsed, abrasive blast previous coat until surface film is removed. Wash and clean surface with cleaning solvent. Apply succeeding coat within Maximum Time Between Coats or as recommended by coating manufacturer, whichever is sooner.
f. When succeeding coat is applied over previous coat which has cured or set or Maximum Time Between Coats has lapsed, and surface has not been abrasive blasted, remove entire coating system to substrate, and apply new coating system.
g. Where coating system is applied to exterior concrete surfaces below grade, extend system at least 3 inches above finish grade in straight level. Step extended system down 3 inches when extended system reaches 6 inches above finish grade.
3.12 Concrete Restoration With 100% Epoxy Coating Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows:
2. Mechanically remove all loose concrete material.
3. Abrasive blast all concrete and metal surfaces to be coated in accordance with SSPC SP-5.
4. Prepare all surfaces to be coated with in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions.
B. Application:
1. Apply cementacious (ML-72) and 100% epoxy coatings (DS-4) in accordance with the manufacturers general application requirements and as follows:
2. Apply to 1" thickness of cementacious coating.
3. Apply 100% epoxy to 100 mills on top of cementacious.
3.13 Hydro-POX
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as follows:
2. Mechanically remove all loose material.
3. Abrasive blast all concrete and metal surfaces to be coated in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
4. Prepare all surfaces to be coated with in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions.
B. Application:
1. Apply Hydro-POX in accordance with the manufacturers general application requirements and as follows:
2. Apply to 100 mils minimum thickness.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces and recoat. When approved, apply next coat.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-12 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings.
C. Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge.
D. Dry film thicknesses may be checked with Elcometer or Positector 2000.
E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage holiday detector. Allow ENGINEER to use detector for additional checking.
F. Check wet film thickness before coating cures on concrete or non-ferrous metal substrates.
G. OWNER may test any and all coatings with destructive and non-destructive testing.
CONTRACTOR shall accommodate and assist OWNER and OWNER's inspector with testing all testing and repair test areas at no additional cost to the OWNER.
3.15 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING
A. Items that have received final coat at factory and not listed to receive coating in field.
B. Aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, rubber, stainless steel, chrome, everdur, or lead unless noted below (except st. steel electrical panels at Plant No. 1).
C. Buried or encased piping or conduit.
D. Exterior Concrete.
E. Galvanized pipe trays and cable trays unless noted below.
F. Grease fittings.
G. Fiberglass ducting or tanks in concealed locations unless noted below.
H. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry unless noted below.
3.16 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD
A. In general, apply coatings to steel, iron, plastic, and wood surfaces unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Coat concrete surfaces and anodized aluminum only when specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system as similar listed surfaces. Verify questionable surfaces.
C. Concrete:
1. High Solids Epoxy:
a. Safety markings.
D. Pipe:
1. All new pipe shall be coated in accordance with Section 15052 pipe schedule and as listed in 3.15.E and 3.15F.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 09960-13 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
E. Metals:
1. Alkali Resistant Bitumastic:
a. Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with wood, concrete, or masonry.
2. Epoxy and Polyurethane System: ferrous metal surfaces including a. All new ferrous metal.
b. New Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles. c. Overhead pip rack at truck loading station.
d. Any Other new miscellaneous metals without protective coating. Any manufactures primer coating is not a protective coating.
F. Plastic and Fiberglass:
1. Epoxy and Polyurethane System: Surfaces including
a. All new pipe, hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, and supports.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 10400-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Plastic and metal signs.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Include lists of sign types, sizes, text, and colors; mounting details; locations; and cast metal plaque rubbings and templates.
C. Samples: Include actual materials.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed products for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record of minimum 5 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum 10 projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide signage in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act as published in the Federal Register, Volume 56.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL SAFETY SIGNS
A. Manufacturer: Meeting OSHA Requirements; 40 Mil Thick Aluminum with Baked Enamel Finish. One of the following or equal:
1. Seton Name Plate Co., New Haven, CT, Style SW-G, Special Wording.
B. Danger Sign Colors:
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on red oval with white border in black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on white.
C. Caution Sign Colors:
1. Background: Yellow.
2. Heading: Yellow lettering on black rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering on yellow.
D. Safety Instruction Signs:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 10400-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Background: White.
2. Heading: White lettering on green rectangular panel.
3. Message: Black lettering.
E. Location, Text: As scheduled in Attachment A.
F. Fasteners: Round head stainless steel bolts or screws.
2.02 NON-ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATES
A. Material and Fabrication: Stainless steel sheet, engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled or punched for fasteners.
B. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
C. Text: Manufacturer's name, equipment model number and serial number, identification tag number, and when appropriate, drive speed, motor horsepower and rated capacity, pump rated total dynamic head and impeller size.
2.03 ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATES
A. Material and Fabrication: Black lamicoid with white letters, holes drilled for fasteners.
B. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
C. Text: Purpose and identification of load power source and circuit number for each disconnect means of service, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors and pushbutton station.
2.04 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:
1. Seton Name Plate Co., New Haven, CT.
B. Underground Warning Tapes: Metallic detection tape; minimum 4 mil thick by 6 inch wide polyethylene film with wording, caution, and name of service followed by words, line buried below, repeated continuously along tape length, and alternate metallic and color strips, blue for water, orange for telephone, red for electric, green for sewer, yellow for gas and other services.
C. Voltage Appliques: Seton-Code, vinyl with pressure sensitive adhesive, orange color, 9 by 2-1/4 inches, approximately 1-1/4 inch high letters indicating voltage and word, volts.
D. Hazard Material Signals: In accordance with NFPA Coding System and NFC Standard 79-3; vinyl panels, letters, and symbols with pressure sensitive adhesive, sizes as required for viewing distances, letters and symbols in accordance with Attachment C.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 10400-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
A. Protect adjacent surfaces which may be damaged by installation of signs.
B. Prepare substrates in accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions.
C. Remove scale, dirt, grease, and other contaminates from substrates.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs in accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fasten signs securely in level, plumb, and true to plane positions.
C. Install metal traffic signs where indicated on the Drawings.
D. Lay underground warning tape approximately 6 inches below finish grade above service lines.
E. Apply voltage appliques on exposed medium voltage circuit raceways at maximum 50 foot on center.
3.03 ATTACHMENTS
A. Metal Safety Sign Schedule.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 10400-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
ATTACHMENT A
METAL SAFETY SIGN SCHEDULE
A. NONPOTABLE WATER: (not used)
B. REMOTELY CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT: (2 Total)
1. Location: At equipment that starts automatically by remote control.
2. Height: Standard
3. Size: 17 inches wide by 11 inches high.
4. Heading: DANGER
5. Wording: THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY BY REMOTE
CONTROL
C. CHEMCIAL WARNING: (not Used)
D. SPILL CONTAINMENT: (1 Total)
1. Location: At Trench Drain on West Loading Dock as indicated on the drawings.
2. Height: Standard
3. Size: 17 inches wide by 11 inches high.
4. Heading: SPILL CONTAINMENT
5. Wording: IN CASE OF SPILL CLOSE VALVE
END OF METAL SAFETY SIGN SCHEDULE
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic design and performance requirements for mechanical equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria
2. Section 01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-up.
3. Section 01782 - Operating and Maintenance Data.
4. Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards:
1. AGMA 2001-B88 - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.
2. AGMA 6000-A88 - Specification for Measurement of Linear Vibration on Gear Units.
3. AGMA 6010-E88 - Standard for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Enclosed Drives.
4. AGMA 6019-E89 - Standard for Gear motors using Spur, Helical, Herringbone, Straight Bevel or Spiral Bevel Gears.
5. AGMA 6025-C90 - Sound for enclosed Helical, Herringbone and Spiral Bevel Gear Drives.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. ASME PTC 8.2 - Performance Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps.
2. ANSI/ASME PTC 10 - Performance Test Code - Compressors and Exhausters.
3. ANSI/ASME PTC 17 - Performance Test Code - Reciprocating InternalCombustion Engines.
4. ANSI/ASME PTC 11 - Performance Test Code - Measurement of Shaft Horsepower - Instruments and Apparatus.
C. Antifriction Bearing Manufactures Association (AFBMA) Standards:
1. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3. A 526 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality.
4. B-61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
5. B 62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
6. E 527 - Standard Practice for Numbering Alloys and Metals (UNS).
E. American National Standards Institute/Hydraulic Institute Standards (ANSI/HI):
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. ANSI/HI 1.1-1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
2. ANSI/HI 1.6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests.
3. ANSI/HI 2.1-2.5 - Vertical Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
4. ANSI/HI 2.6 - Vertical Pump Tests.
5. ANSI/HI 3.1-1.5 - Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
6. ANSI/HI 3.6 - Rotary Pump Tests.
7. ANSI/HI 4.1-4.6 - Sealless Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, Operation and Test.
8. ANSI/HI 5.1-1.6 - Sealless Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, Operation and Test.
9. ANSI/HI 6.1-6.5 - Reciprocating Power Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
10. ANSI/HI 7.1-7.5 - Controlled Volume Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.
11. ANSI/HI 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application and Sound Measurement.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Special Tools: Tools that have been specifically made for use on unit of equipment for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance.
B. Resonant Frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an ever larger vibration if no dampening exists.
C. Rotational Frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as revolutions per minute.
D. Critical Frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the installed machine and base.
E. Peak Vibration Velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second.
F. Rotational Speed: Same as rotational frequency.
G. Maximum Excitation Frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a particular machine.
H. Critical Speed: Same as critical frequency.
I. Free Field Noise Level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified otherwise.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over and supersede conflicting provisions as specified in this Section.
2. Provide equipment and parts that are suitable for stresses which may occur during ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
fabrication, transportation, erection, and operation.
3. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
4. Like parts of duplicate units are to be interchangeable.
5. When 2 or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, provide products of same manufacturer.
6. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries required for proper operation.
7. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and contained in Laws and Regulations.
B. Material Requirements:
1. Materials: Suitable for superior corrosion resistance and for services under conditions normally encountered in similar installations.
2. Dissimilar Metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material.
C. Power Transmission Systems:
1. Power Transmission Equipment: V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains, sprockets, mechanical variable-speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting, intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day continuous service or frequent stops-and-starts intermittent service, whichever is most severe, and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5.
a. Apply 1.5 service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime source of power and not to actual equipment loading.
b. Apply service factors higher than 1.5 when recommended for continuous 24 hour-per-day operation and shock loadings specified in AGMA 6010-E88, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable referenced standards. c. When manufacturer recommends service factor greater than 1.5, manufacturer's recommendation takes precedence.
D. Vibration:
1. Resonant Frequency: Ensure there are no natural resonant torsional, radial, or axial frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be excited by the equipment design.
2. Design, balance and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in Section 15958.
E. Equipment Mounting and Anchoring:
1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel support frames. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges between steel members. Grind welds smooth.
2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits.
3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over 1,000 pounds.
4. Anchor equipment base to concrete pad. Determine number, size, type, and location of bolts, anchor bolts, or other connections.
5. Provide bolt sleeves for anchor bolts for heavy equipment. Adjust bolts to final location and fill sleeve with non-shrink grout.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
F. Structural Design:
1. For equipment with operating weight of 400 pounds or more provide seismic calculations in accordance with Section 01612 including:
a. Determination of operating weight and centroid of equipment. 1) Operating weight is to be weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally contained in unit during operation.
b. Determination of shear and tension forces in connections. c. Design of connection details based on calculated shear and tension forces.
G. Equipment Units Weighing 50 pounds or More: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For each item of Equipment:
a. Design features.
b. Load capacities.
c. Efficiency ratings.
d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade. e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. f. Catalog data.
g. Name plate data.
h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials and accessories or options being furnished.
2. Gear Reduction Units:
a. Engineering information per applicable AGMA standards. b. Gear mesh frequencies.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Drawings for Equipment:
a. Drawings that include outline drawings, cut-away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements.
2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints, couplings, drive arrangement, gears, baseplate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components.
3. Installation and check-out instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial start-up procedures.
4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer based controls.
5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures.
6. Alarm and shutdown setpoints for all controls furnished.
C. Calculations:
1. Calculations and other information to substantiate base plates, supports, and anchor bolts meet minimum design strength requirements.
2. Bearing L10 life calculations in accordance with AFBMA 9 or AFBMA 11 calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other drive line components with bearings.
3. Calculations and other information to substantiate that operating rotational ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
frequencies meet the requirements of this Section.
4. Torsional Analysis of Power Transmission Systems: When torsional analysis specified in the equipment Sections, provide:
a. Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness.
b. Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of system components and complete system.
5. Seismic Connection calculations for equipment and support connection details demonstrating compliance with specified structural design requirements in section 01612.
6. Seismic and anchoring calculations for all piping, mechanical and electrical supports including manufactured standard supports and any support referencing typical details included with the contract drawings.
7. Require Professional Engineer registered in state where Project is located to stamp and sign calculations.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Source quality control reports and certified test data as specified in Section 15958.
2. Submit factory test reports before shipment.
3. Certified static and dynamic balancing reports for rotating equipment.
4. Field quality control reports and test data as specified in Section 15958.
5. Start-up Plan: Proposed plan for field testing equipment as specified in Section 01756.
6. Certificate of Proper Installation: As specified in Section 01756.
7. Submit material test reports a specified in the equipment sections.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. As specified in Section 01782.
2. Submit prior to training of Owner's personnel.
3. Make available at project site complete copy of manuals for use by field personnel and Engineer during start-up and testing of equipment.
4. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing; include calculated ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer raceways.
5. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Equipment manufacturer and system component manufacturers to have a minimum of 5 years experience in the design, manufacture, and assembly of the specified equipment and components with an established record of successful operation of such equipment and components.
B. References: Provide references from a minimum of 3 installations currently operating the same model equipment in continuous service for a minimum of 2 years under similar operating conditions. Reference information shall include location, service, contact person, and contact phone number.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service:
1. Furnish services of authorized representative specially trained in installation of equipment.
a. Visit project site and perform tasks necessary to certify installation. b. Furnish Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in Section 01756.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping:
1. Equipment: Pack in boxes, crates, or otherwise protect from damage and moisture, dust, or dirt during shipment, handling, and storage.
2. Bearings: Separately pack or otherwise suitably protect during transport.
3. Spare Parts: Deliver in boxes labeled with contents, equipment to which spare parts belong, and name of Contractor.
B. Storage:
1. Equipment Having Bearings: Store in enclosed facilities. Rotate units at least once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacture to protect rotating elements and bearings.
2. Gear Boxes: Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.
C. Protection:
1. Equipment: Protect equipment from deleterious exposure.
2. Painted Surfaces: Protect against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Equipment for project is to be suitable for performance in wastewater treatment plant environment and under following conditions:
a. Ambient Temperatures: 0 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Relative Humidities: 30 to 100 percent.
c. Site Elevation: About 25 feet above mean sea level.
1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Equipment Anchoring: Obtain from equipment manufacturers' anchoring material and templates or setting drawings in time for anchors to be cast-in-place when concrete is placed.
B. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible.
C. General Start-up and Testing of Equipment:
1. Perform general start-up and testing procedures after operation and maintenance manuals for equipment have been received.
2. Conduct functional testing of mechanical or electrical systems when each system is substantially complete and after general start-up and testing procedures have been successfully completed.
3. Functional testing requirements as specified in Sections 01756, 15958 and the equipment sections.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Minimum warranty for all equipment to be free of defects in material and workmanship for 1 year from the date of provisional acceptance for on-going municipal operational use of the equipment by the Owner. Warranty shall cover parts and labor.
Provide longer warranties when specified in the individual equipment sections.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Where warranty exceeds 1 year, manufacturer’s warranty shall be issued in the Owner’s name beginning on the date of provisional acceptance for on-going municipal operational use of the equipment by the Owner.
C. Provisional acceptance for on-going municipal operational use shall require substantial completion for those elements to be utilized to maintain municipal operations during construction; pass all acceptance testing and all related punch list items shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner; and the Owner shall agree in writing to provisionally accept those elements before operational transitioning occurs. Provisional acceptance is limited to those elements described in the written acceptance from the Owner.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Special Tools:
1. When specified, provide special tools required for operation and maintenance.
2. Mark or tag and list such tools in maintenance and operations instructions.
Describe use of each tool.
B. Spare Belts:
1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type and size of belt-driven unit.
a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets. b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size, and use.
c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.
C. Spare Parts:
1. Assume responsibility until turned over to Owner at substantial completion unless otherwise directed by the Construction Manager.
2. Store in enclosed facilities.
3. Furnish itemized list and match identification tag attached to every part.
4. List parts by generic title and identification number.
5. Furnish name, address, and telephone number of supplier and spare parts warehouse.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ferrous Materials:
1. Steel for Members used in Fabrication of Assemblies: ASTM A 36.
2. Iron Castings: Tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blow-holes, flaws, and other imperfections conforming to ASTM A 48.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge), ASTM A 526.
4. Expanded Metal: ASTM A 36, 13 gauge, ½ inch flat pattern expanded metal.
B. Nonferrous Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: Type 304 or 316 as specified; provide L grade where welding required.
2. Bronze Which Contacts Liquid: Composition of not more than 2 percent aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C92200 or C92700 in accordance with ASTM B 62, B-61, B-505, or B-584, when not specified otherwise.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-8 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
C. Dielectric Materials for Separation of Dissimilar Metals:
1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials.
D. Anchors Bolts: As Recommended by the Manufacturer; minimum 0.5 inch diameter.
2.02 SHAFT COUPLINGS
A. General:
1. Type and Ratings: Provide nonlubricated type, designed for not less than 50,000 hours of operating life.
2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application, considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service.
3. Use: Use of couplings specified in this Section does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide precision alignment of driver-driven units as required by equipment manufacturer and alignment criteria specified elsewhere in this section.
4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Lovejoy.
b. Dodge.
c. T.B. Woods.
B. Shaft couplings for close coupled electric motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to sudden torque reversals:
1. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, and end float.
2. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber, built up with duck and wire reinforcement with synthetic tension members bonded together in rubber.
3. Attach flexible component to flanges with clamping rings and cap screws. Attach flanges to shafts with taper-lock bushings which provide equivalent of shrunk-on fit.
4. Do not allow metal-to-metal contact between driver and driven equipment.
5. Examples of Loads Where Sudden Torque Reversals may be Expected:
a. Reciprocating pumps, blowers, and compressors.
b. Conveyor belts.
c. Reversing equipment.
C. Shaft couplings for direct connected electric motor driven equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to normal torque, non-reversing applications:
1. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration, and shaft misalignment or offset.
2. Provide preloaded neoprene cylinder type couplings.
3. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins.
D. Spacer Couplings: Where cartridge type mechanical seals or non-split seals are specified, provide a spacer type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal without disturbing the driver or driven equipment mountings unless noted otherwise in the individual equipment specifications.
E. Specialized Couplings: Where requirements of equipment dictate specialized features, supply coupling recommended for service by manufacturer.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-9 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2.03 STUFFING BOX, SEAL CHAMBER, AND SHAFT SEALS
A. General:
1. Unless otherwise noted in the equipment section, provide cartridge type, double mechanical shaft seals for pumps.
2. Provide a stuffing box large enough for a double mechanical seal.
3. Where packing is specified, provide stuffing box large enough to receive a double mechanical seal.
4. Provide seal or packing flush connections, 3/4 inch size unless another size is indicated on the Drawings. Provide and route leakage drain line to nearest equipment floor drain indicated on the Drawings.
5. For pumps with packing, design packing gland to allow adjustment and repacking without dismantling pump except to open up packing box.
B. Packing: When specified in the equipment section of the specifications, provide the following type of packing:
1. Wastewater, Water, and Sludge Applications:
a. Asbestos free.
b. PTFE (Teflon) free.
c. Braided graphite.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, 1400.
2) John Crane Inc., equivalent product.
2. Drinking Water Service:
a. Approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) or National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
b. Asbestos free.
c. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon).
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Chesterton, 1725.
2) John Crane, Inc., equivalent product.
C. Mechanical Seals: Provide seal types specified in the equipment sections and as specified herein.
1. Provide seal types meeting the following requirements:
a. Balanced hydraulically.
b. Spring: Stationary, out of pumping fluid, Hastelloy C; Type 316 stainless steel for split seals.
c. O-Ring: Viton 747.
d. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel.
e. Set Screws: Type 316L stainless steel.
f. Hard Face: Reaction bonded, Silicon Carbide.
g. Soft Face: Carbon, Union Carbide 658 RC.
h. Seal designed to withstand 125 pounds per square inch gauge minimum differential pressures in either direction; no requirement for seal buffer pressure to be maintained when pump is not operational even though process suction head may be present in pump.
2. Cartridge Type Single Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Chesterton, 155.
b. John Crane, 88 SRS Series.
3. Cartridge Type Double Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Chesterton, 225.
b. John Crane, 88 RS Series.
4. Split Face Single Mechanical: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-10 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
a. Chesterton, 442 (single).
b. John Crane, 37 (single).
2.04 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS
A. Type: Helical or herringbone, unless otherwise specified.
B. Design:
1. Made of alloys treated for hardness and for severe service.
2. AGMA Class II service.
a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit's manufacturer.
3. Cast iron housing with gears running in oil.
4. Anti-friction bearings.
5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime mover not actual load.
6. Manufactured in accordance with applicable AGMA standards.
C. Planetary gear units are not to be used.
2.05 BELT DRIVES
A. Sheaves:
1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap tightening screws.
2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set of sheaves.
3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operate at peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute.
4. Key bushings to drive shaft.
B. Belts: Anti-static type when explosion-proof equipment or environment is specified.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper-Lock bushings.
2. Woods's, Super-V belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Sure-Grip bushings.
2.06 BEARINGS
A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard manufacture.
B. Oil Lubricated Bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir splash type system.
1. Oil Lubrication Systems: Sized to safely absorb heat energy normally generated in bearings under maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees Celsius; provide external cooler when required, air cooled if water cooling source not indicated on the Drawings. Equip with filler pipe and external level gauge.
C. Grease Lubricated Bearings, Except Those Specified to Be Factory Sealed: Fit with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings.
1. Lubrication Lines and Fittings:
a. Lines: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel tubing. b. Multiple Fitting Assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible location.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-11 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
c. Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings.
1) Manufacturer:
a) Alenite
b) Zurk.
c) or equal.
D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with AFBMA 9 or AFBMA 11 for L10 rating life of not less than 50,000 hours.
1. Higher ratings, when specified in other Sections, supersede preceding requirement.
2.07 SAFETY GUARDS
A. Drive Assemblies: Enclose sprockets, belts, drive chains, gearings, couplings, and other moving parts on drive assemblies in safety enclosures that are in compliance with applicable Laws and Regulations.
B. Shafts: Provide guards that protect personnel from rotating shafts or components within 7.5 feet of floors or operating platforms.
C. Hot Surfaces: Insulate all surfaces with normal operating temperatures above 120 degrees Fahrenheit when surface is within 7.5 feet height from any operating floor or level; insulation thickness such that temperature is below 120 degrees; cover insulation with moisture-proof protective jacket; insulation Type 3 and cover Type 5 as specified in Section 15082.
D. Guard Requirements:
1. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal.
2. Allow access to lubrication fittings.
3. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations.
4. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent larger and addition of one belt.
E. Materials:
1. Sheet Metal: Carbon steel, 12 gauge minimum thickness, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel.
2.08 SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Design Requirements:
1. Telescopic top and bottom housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces.
2. Use steel coil springs.
3. Design vibration isolators in accordance with seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01612.
B. Performance Requirements: Minimum spring deflection of 1/2 inch under static load and capable of limiting transmissability to 10 percent maximum at design operating load.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD.
2. Mason Industries, equivalent product.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-12 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
D. Materials:
1. Fabricate isolators using welded steel or shatterproof ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536 Grade CS-45-12.
2. Spring Steel: ASTM A 125.
2.09 FABRICATION
A. Nameplates:
1. Engraved or stamped on Type 304 stainless steel and fastened to equipment at factory in an accessible and visible location.
2. Indicate Following Information as Applicable:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Equipment model number and serial number.
c. Maximum and Normal rotating speed.
d. Horsepower.
e. Rated capacity.
f. Service class per applicable standards.
3. Nameplates for Pumps: Include:
a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid.
b. Rated flow in gallons per minute.
c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size.
4. Gear Reduction Units: Include:
a. AGMA Class of service.
b. Service factor.
c. Input and output speeds.
B. Bolt Holes in Equipment Support Frames: Do not exceed bolt diameter by more than 25 percent, up to limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4 inch.
C. Shop Finishing:
1. Provide coating as follows:
a. Bases and Support Frames That Contact Concrete or Other Material: Paint contacting surfaces with minimum of 2 coats of zinc chromate primer before installation or grouting.
b. Shop Primer for Steel and Iron Surfaces, Unless Specified Otherwise:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Ameron, Amercoat 185 Universal Primer.
b) Cook, 391-N-167 Barrier Coat.
c) Kop-Coat, Pug Primer.
d) Tnemec, 37-77 Chem-Prime.
e) Valspar, 13-R-28 Chromox Primer.
c. Coat machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted with rust-preventive compounds.
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Houghton, Rust Veto 344.
b) Rust-Oleum, R-9.
d. Coating for Ferrous Metal Surfaces, Except Stainless Steel: High solids polyamine epoxy.
e. Finish Painting Pumps and Motors: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's premium protective coating system for sever corrosive environments.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15050-13 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 15958 for testing requirements and the individual equipment sections of the Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and proper torques and tightness of fasteners.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test equipment as specified in Section 15958 and the individual equipment Section of the Specifications.
B. Perform operational testing as required by Section 01756.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Field Check-out: Before field testing and start-up, provide services of factory trained field service representative to certify the equipment has been installed, aligned and checked in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and the Specifications.
B. Testing: Provide services of factory trained representative to observe and advise the Contractor during field quality control testing.
C. Training: When training is specified, provide services of factory trained representative to perform training as specified in Section 01756.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15052
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic piping materials and methods.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.
2. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
3. Section 15061 - Pipe Supports.
4. Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
2. A 106 - Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
3. D 2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Aboveground Piping: Piping within buildings, tunnels, or other structures without regard to elevation of piping, or exposed piping outside buildings and structures.
B. Underground Piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete.
C. Underwater Piping: Piping below tops of walls in basins or concrete tanks containing water.
D. Wet Wall: Wall with water on at least one side.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Piping Drawings:
1. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings.
2. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed.
a. Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Times.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Venting Piping Under Pressure:
a. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping. Provide one inch plug valves for water lines, and 2 inch plug valves for sewage and sludge lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
c. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping as required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling. d. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs.
Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion in accordance with Section 09960.
2. Restraining Piping:
a. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction, changes sizes, and at ends.
1) When piping is underground, use concrete thrust block or mechanical restraints.
2) When piping is aboveground or under water, use mechanical or structural restraints.
3) Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of the piping by design test pressure of the piping.
b. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test pressures.
1) During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does not require permanent restraints.
c. Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil. Place concrete so piping joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are accessible for assembly and disassembly.
d. Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in the Piping Schedule.
3. Connections to Existing Piping:
a. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings. 1) Protect domestic water supplies from contamination.
a) Make connections between domestic water supply and other water systems in accordance with requirements of public health authorities.
b) Provide devices approved by OWNER of domestic water supply system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic supply system.
b. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.
c. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make connections to existing piping.
4. Connections to In-service Piping:
a. Shutdown in-service piping in accordance with Section 01140. 1) Establish procedures and timing in a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER of the in-service piping. b. Where operation and maintenance of existing facilities require that a shutdown be made during hours other than normal working hours, perform the related work in coordination with the hours of actual shutdown. c. Additional provisions regarding shutdown of existing facilities are specified in Section 01140 Work Restrictions.
5. Connections at Dissimilar Metals:
a. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions between dissimilar metals.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set b. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358.
2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105.
3. Beaton and Corbin, Model Number 1 or Number 13.
B. Material: Chrome plated steel plate.
2.02 LINK TYPE SEALS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Calpico, Inc.
2. Thunderline Corporation, Link-Seal.
B. Characteristics:
1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening.
2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe.
3. Provide a stainless steel or glass reinforced nylon pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.
2.03 GASKETS
A. Gaskets for Non-steam Cleaned Ductile Iron and Steel Piping:
1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, temperatures equal to and less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service.
2. Gasket Material:
a. Neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70. b. Reinforcement: Inserted 13 ounce nylon fabric cloth for pipes 20 inch or larger.
c. Thickness: Minimum 3/32 inch thick for less than 10 inch pipe; minimum 1/8 inch thick for 10 inch and larger pipe.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Pipe 20 inches in Diameter and Larger:
1) Garlock, Style 8798.
2) John Crane, similar product.
b. Pipe less than 20 inches in Diameter:
1) Garlock, Style 7797.
2) John Crane, similar product.
B. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Polyvinyl Chloride and Polyethylene Piping:
1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120 degrees Fahrenheit, polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other chemicals, except ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set chemicals which liberate free fluorine including fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine.
2. Material:
a. Microcellular Teflon outer layers with rigid center layer. b. Sealability in accordance with ASTM F37, lass than 0.55 millimeters/hr leakage of iso-octane at 1,000 psi gasket load and 9.8 psig fluid pressure.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Garlock, Style 3545.
b. John Crane, similar product.
C. Gaskets for Flanged Joints in Ductile Iron, or Steel Water Piping:
1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal and less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Material:
a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, non-asbestos fiber reinforcement. b. Teflon ring; or teflon envelope with nonasbestos filler.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Bluegard, Style 3300.
b. Garlock.
c. John Crane, similar product.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Existing Conditions:
1. Locate and expose existing structures, piping, conduits, and other facilities and obstructions which may affect construction of underground piping before starting excavation for new underground piping and appurtenances.
2. Verify sizes, elevations, locations, and other relevant features of existing facilities and obstructions. Determine conflicts for the construction of the new underground piping and appurtenances.
3. Make piping location and grade adjustments to resolve conflicts between new piping and existing facilities and obstructions.
3.02 WALL AND SLAB PENETRATIONS
A. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and concrete walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, pilasters, columns, piers, and beams unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
B. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than 1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter of piping.
1. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves and replaced without disturbing the structure.
2. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster.
3. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through floors, walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings.
4. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set C. Cast couplings or wall pieces in walls for penetrations of buried rigid piping including cast iron, ductile iron, reinforced concrete, and vitrified clay through structures.
1. Provide couplings or wall pieces with mechanical push-ons, restrained where indicated or required, or similar flexible joints at outside faces of walls.
2. Provide additional similar joints in piping at transition points between trenches and structure excavations.
3. For steel piping, single joints may be used in lieu of 2 joints. Locate single joints outside within 2 feet from outside faces of walls.
D. Link Seal: Use 2 link seals where seal is used to seal at wet wall sleeves. Mount one seal on the inside face of the wall and the other on the outside face of the wall.
Coordinate the inside diameter of the wall sleeve with the size of the seal to provide watertight sealing.
E. Where not indicated on the Drawings, penetrations for conditions other than those specified under the preceding subparagraphs shall be 1 of the 3 types specified in such subparagraphs found by ENGINEER to be the most suitable for the particular conditions.
3.03 EXPOSED PIPING
A. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless indicated otherwise.
1. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
Slope plumbing drain piping with 1/8 inch per foot downward in the direction of flow.
B. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations have been determined.
C. Support piping in accordance with Section 15061.
1. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.
D. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, and other types of joints or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.
E. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment.
1. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections.
2. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses.
3. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements shall slip freely into place.
4. Alter piping assembly to fit when proper fit is not obtained.
5. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump suction piping.
3.04 BURIED PIPING
A. Bury piping with minimum 3 foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set B. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Laying Piping:
1. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the lowest point with bell ends up slope.
2. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position.
3. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full length of barrels.
4. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.
5. At the end of each day's construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily to prevent entrance of debris or animals.
3.05 PIPING ALTERNATIVES
A. Provide piping in accordance with this Section, unless indicated on the Drawings or specified otherwise.
B. Alternative Pipe Ratings: Piping with greater pressure rating than specified may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price. Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping.
C. Valves in Piping Sections: Capable of withstanding specified test pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping.
D. For flanged joints, where one of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Piping Cleaning:
1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and debris.
Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.
3.07 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Abbreviations:
1. The following abbreviations used in the column of test method refer to the respective methods specified in Section 15956.
AM Air method
GR Gravity method
HH High head method
LH Low head method
SC Special case
2. Abbreviations to designate piping include the following:
BSP Black steel pipe
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set BRV Braided Vinyl Tubing
CI Cast iron
CISP Cast iron soil pipe
Cl Class, followed by the designation
CMP Corrugated metal pipe
CPVC Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
DIP Ductile iron piping
Ga Gauge, preceded by the designation
GSP Galvanized steel pipe
NPS Nominal pipe size, followed by the number in inches PSIG Pounds per square inch, gauge
PE Polyethylene
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
RCP Reinforced concrete low head pressure pipe
Sch. Schedule, followed by the designation
SS Stainless steel
VCP Vitrified clay piping
3. Abbreviations to designate piping joints and fittings include the following:
B&SP
CMP
Bell and spigot
Compression Fittings
FLG Flanged
GE Grooved end joint
Mech.
Rest.
Mechanically restrained
MJ Mechanical joint
PO Push on joint
SCRD Screwed joint
SW Solvent weld joint
WLD Welded joint
4. Abbreviations to designate piping joints and fittings include the following:
CLTE Coal tar enamel lining
CM Cement mortar
CTE Coal tar epoxy lining
CTP Coal tar pitch
EC Extruded coating
EPP Epoxy high performance coating per Section 09960
GL Glass lining
PE Polyethylene lining
PEE Polyethylene encasement
PTW Plastic tape wrap
PUL Polyurethane lined
(The PIPING SCHEDULE follows in the next pages.)
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15052-8 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
Bid Set 15052-9 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility
PIPING SCHEDULE
Process
Abbrev. Service
Nominal
Diameter
(inches)
Materials Joints/ Fittings
Test
Pressure/
Method
Lining Coating Comments
FW Food Waste
Aboveground where
shown as pipe and
pump discharge.
6” Sch 10 Stainless
Steel
Flanged 300 psig/HH None None
Aboveground, where
shown as hose
6” Goodyear Plicord®
ExtremeFlex™
Petroleum Transfer
Hose
Stainless Steel
Camlock
100 psig/HH None
None
SD Screw Drain
Aboveground, where
shown as hose
3”
Goodyear Plicord®
ExtremeFlex™
Petroleum Transfer
Hose
Stainless Steel
Camlock
100 psig/HH None None
HPA Service Air ½ to 2” Sch. 40 GSP Screwed -- None EPP 2W Non-Potable Water ½ to 2” Sch. 40 GSP Screwed -- None EPP Notes:
1. All exposed piping shall coated in accordance with Sections 09960.
2. All buried piping under concrete slabs and/or structures shall be concrete encased, unless indicated in writing otherwise.
3. All Piping shall be restrained per Section 15052 – Article 1.04 B.2.
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15061-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15061
PIPE SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria
2. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
3. Section 09910 - Paints.
4. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standard Institute or Manufacturer's Standardization Society (ANSI/MSS):
1. SP-58 - Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
2. SP-69 - Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Responsibility:
1. The CONTRACTOR providing the pipe support system shall be considered the designer of the support system. Typical details included on the contract documents are for minimum standard for style, size, and materials and shall be used as a guide for the CONTRACTOR in designing the specific pipe supports utilized on the project.
2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system.
4. Seismic Design Criteria: As specified in Section 01612 as specified for all pipe supports utilized for the project, including any typical pipe support details included on the contract documents that are actually utilized.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include schedule, indicating where supports will be installed, and drawings of pipe support system components.
B. Seismic and anchoring calculations for all supports utilized on the project whether premanufactured or per the typical details included on the contract drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Concrete Inserts for Pipes under 30 Inch Diameter: ANSI/MSS SP-69 Type 18.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15061-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set Minimum 1,140 pounds capacity with 5/8 inch diameter rod. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 282.
B. Concrete Inserts for Pipe 30 Inch Diameter and Larger: Hot-dip galvanized steel body with 3/4 inch diameter National Coarse zinc plated square nut, anchor insert to steel concrete reinforcement. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Connection Specialties, Inc., Model 6MD350.
C. Hanger Rods: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturers: One of following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 140.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 5000.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3205.
D. Hanger Rods, Continuously Threaded: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 146.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part BP-5006.
E. Eye Bolts: Welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod.
F. Welded Eyebolt Rod: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 278.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 5004.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3210.
G. Adjustable Ring Hangers: ANSI/MSS SP 69 Type 7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3172.
H. Adjustable Clevis Hangers: ANSI/MSS PS 69, Type 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 260.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6750.
3. B-Line systems, Inc., Figure B3100 or B3105.
I. Adjustable Clevis Hangers for Insulated Pipe: Oversize. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 300.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6754.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc. Figure B3108.
J. Single Rod Hangers for Steam Pipe: ANSI/MSS SP 69 Type 43; malleable iron or steel yoke and roller hangers; swivel to allow rotation of yoke on rod. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 181.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3110.
K. Double Rod Hangers for Steam Pipe: ANSI/MSS SP 69 Type 41: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 171.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3114.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15061-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set L. Brackets: ANSI/MSS SP-69 Type 32 with back plate; rated for 1,500 pounds.
Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 195.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066.
M. Standard U-bolt: ANSI/MSS SP-69 Type 24. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 137.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6510.
3. B-Line systems, Inc., Figure B3188.
N. Riser Clamps: ANSI/MSS SP-69 Type 8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 261.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6302.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3373.
O. Pipe Clamps: ANSI/MSS SP 69 Type 4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 212.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6100.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3140.
P. Adjustable Offset Pipe Clamp: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 100.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149.
Q. Offset Pipe Clamp: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 103.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3148.
R. Floor Stand or Stanchion Saddles: ANSI/MSS SP-69 Type 37. Provided with U-bolt hold down yokes. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 259.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6652.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3090.
S. Spring Supports: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Bergen-Paterson, Part 3200.
2. Grinnell, Figure B-268.
T. One Hole Pipe Clamps: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 126.
2. Carpenter and Paterson, Figure 237.
U. Welded Beam Attachment: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 66.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 1047.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3083.
V. Heavy Pipe Clamp: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Grinnell, Figure 216.
2. Bergen-Paterson, Part 6101.
W. Anchor Bolts, Flush Shells, Powder Actuated Fasteners, and Concrete Anchors: As ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15061-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set specified in Section 05120.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Supports:
1. Stainless Steel (type 304 or 316): Use in all exterior and all submerged locations, above water level but below top of wall inside water bearing structures and where specifically indicated on the Drawings.
2. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel: Use in areas other than above and where specifically indicated on the Drawings. Hot-dip galvanize pipe support after fabrication.
3. Plastic, Aluminum, FRP and Other Miscellaneous Materials: Use where specifically indicated on the Drawings
B. Fasteners:
1. As specified in Section 05120.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Properly support, suspend or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, blowers, and other equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall provide proper supports for piping even if piping supports are not indicated on the drawings.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall follow support typical details and apply support details where applicable at all locations whether specifically called or not on the drawings.
C. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to formwork prior to placing concrete.
D. Use flush shells only where indicated on the Drawings.
E. Do not use anchors relying on deformation of lead alloy.
F. Do not use stud type powder actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel pipe larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.
G. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods. Secured with double nuts.
H. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.
I. Use adjustable ring hangers; or adjustable clevis hangers, for 6 inch and smaller diameter pipe.
J. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 6 inches in diameter.
K. Secure pipes with galvanized double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger rods and hangers.
L. Support Spacing:
1. Support 2 inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15061-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Support larger than 2 inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum 10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet on center, regardless of size.
4. Support tubing, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-reinforced plastic pipe or duct, and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging greater than 1/4 inch between supports.
M. Install Supports At:
1. Horizontal bends.
2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections.
3. Base of risers.
4. Floor penetrations.
5. Connections to pumps, blowers and other equipment.
6. Valves and appurtenances.
N. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during operation of valves.
O. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial movement through anchors.
P. Provide ductile iron elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings where indicated on the Drawings.
Q. Support base fittings with metal supports or when indicated on the Drawings, concrete piers.
R. Size hanger rods, supports, clamps, anchors, brackets, and guides in accordance with ANSI/MSS SP 58 and SP 69.
S. Do not use chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.
T. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code.
U. Supports, Clamps, Brackets, and Portions of Support System Bearing Against Copper Pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl chloride tape.
V. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers.
W. Install insulation shield in accordance with ANSI/MSS SP 69, Type 40. Shield shall be galvanized steel unless specified elsewhere.
X. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings.
Y. Paint or Coat support system components as specified in Sections 09960 or 09910.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15075-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Mechanical Identification including the following:
1. Pipe identification by color and legend.
2. Special Items.
3. Identification of equipment and components of systems with paint, brands, tags, and signboards.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.
3. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. A 13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Following:
1. Product Data.
2. Samples.
3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
4. Submit following as specified in Section 01770:
a. Operation and Maintenance Data.
b. Warranty.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with CalOSHA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Seton, Opti Code Pipe Markers.
2. Lab Safety Supply.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Markers: Self adhesive vinyl, suitable for outdoor application from -40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit; meet ANSI A 13.1 requirements.
1. Lettering:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15075-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set Nominal Pipe Diameter Lettering Size
Less than 1.5 ½ inch
1.5 inches to 2 inches ¾ inch
2.5 inches to 6 inches 1-1/4 inches
8 inches to 10 inches 2-1/2 inches
over 10 inches 3-1/2 inches
2. Marker Colors:
Service Lettering Background
Flammables, chemicals, toxics Black Yellow
Water, nontoxic solutions or low
hazard liquids
White Green
Nonflammable or nontoxic gases White Blue
Fire quenching fluids (foam, fire
water, CO2 Halon)
White Red
B. Paint: As specified in Section 09960.
C. Pipe Identification Tags: Aluminum or stainless steel with stamped-in 1/4 inch high identifying lettering.
D. Pipe Identification Tag Chains: Aluminum or stainless steel.
E. Snap-on Markers: One of following with 3/4 inch high letters for 3/4 to 4 inch pipe or covering, or 5 inch high letters for 5 inch or larger pipe or cover:
1. Brady Bradysnap-On B-915.
2. Seton Setmark.
2.03 SPECIAL ITEMS
A. In addition, special painting of following items will be required:
ITEM COLOR
Valve handwheels and levers Red
Hoist hooks and blocks Yellow and black stripes
Steel guard posts In accordance with standard details.
B. Paint minimum 2 inches high numbers on or adjacent to accessible valves, pumps, flow-meters, and other items of equipment which are identified on Drawings or in Specifications by number.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15075-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification.
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation and application of products as specified in Section 01600.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and paint surfaces as specified in Section 09960.
B. Prepare surface in accordance with product manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all exposed piping and valves and piping and valves in accessible chases with lettering or tags designating service of each piping system with flow directional arrows and color code.
1. Coated or Painted Piping 3 inches and larger shall have pipe designation and flow arrows painted onto piping wit stencil.
2. Piping 3/4 to 2-1/2 inches shall have snap on markers.
3. Pipe smaller than 5/8 shall have metal tag markers
4. All Insulated piping have snap on markers over the insulation jacket.
5. Chemical piping shall have snap on markers or metal tags.
B. Color Code:
1. Paint piping scheduled to be color coded completely with specified colors.
2. Paint segments of pipe specified to be unpainted with specified coding color long enough to accommodate required lettering and arrows.
C. Paint piping specified to be painted to match adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise directed.
D. Lettering and Flow Direction Arrows:
1. Stencil lettering on painted bands or use snap-on markers on pipe to identify pipe.
When stenciling, stencil 3/4 inch high letters on 3/4 through 4 inch pipe or coverings, or 5 inch high letters on 5 inch and larger pipe or coverings.
2. Provide lettering and flow direction arrows near equipment served, adjacent to valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each branch or tee, and at intervals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe.
E. Where scheduled, space 6 inch wide bands along stainless steel pipe at 10 foot intervals and other pipe at 5 foot intervals.
F. Label chemical tank fill pipelines at locations which are visible from chemical fill stations.
G. Metal Tags:
1. Where outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, provide metal pipe identification tags instead of lettering.
2. Fasten pipe identification tags to pipe with chain.
3. Where tags are used, color code pipe as scheduled.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15075-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Identify piping with legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers; use self adhesive arrow roll tape to secure ends of piping markers and indicate flow direction.
B. Provide legend markers, directional arrow markers and number markers where piping passes through walls or floors, at piping intersections and at maximum 15 foot spacing on piping runs.
C. Provide piping marker letters and colors as scheduled.
D. Place markers on piping so they are visible from operator's position in walkway or working platform near piping. Locate markers along horizontal centerline of pipe, unless better visibility is achieved elsewhere.
3.05 PIPING COLOR CODE AND MARKER SCHEDULE
Service Fluid Pipe Color Marker Legend
1W Blue 1W
FW Not Painted FOOD WASTE
Air Yellow AIR
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15102-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
Section 15102
STAINLESS STEEL KNIFE GATE VALVES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
The work of this section consists of furnishing stainless steel knife gate valves for sludge cake including motor(s), mount(s), and all accessories and components necessary for proper operation for the assigned service.
1.02 EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBERS
Equipment Tag Number Description Valve Size
(Inches)
Motorized
Valve No. 1 Food Waste Pump Discharge 6 No
Valve No. 2 Food Waste Pump Discharge 6 No
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01300: Submittals
B. Section 11010: General Mechanical Equipment Provisions (includes Electric Motors)
C. Section 15100: Valves
D. Section 15135: Electric Operators
E. Division 16: Electrical
1.04 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS
Valves shall conform to the following:
Technical Association of Pulp and Paper Industry (TAPPI) Standard TIS 405-8.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Valves shall be electrically operated or manually operated stainless steel knife gate ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15102-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
valves for use with sludge cake. Manually operated valves shall be provided with geared operators to allow manual actuation at maximum design pressure.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit affidavit of satisfactory completion of seat test.
C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists.
PART 2: MATERIALS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
One of the following or equal:
A. DeZurik, style KGS
B. A-C Valve Inc., Figure 77
2.02 VALVE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Full port, smooth flow, designed for high pressure, pulsating service with dewatered sewage sludge (Food waste sludge cake).
B. Class 300 flanged ends per ANSI B 16.5, or lugged ends.
C. Conform to the minimum requirements of TAPPI TIS 405-8.
D. Drip tight shut off.
E. Rising stem opening.
F. Bonnet may be provided at vendor option.
G. Valve shall have cast parts with bolted construction. Welded valves are not acceptable.
H. Maximum Working Pressure: Not less than 300 pounds per square inch at 160 °F.
I. For Manually Operated Valves: Provide hand wheel actuator with adjustable screws to stop travel at both open and closed positions. Actuator shall clearly indicate valve position for any point of operation.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15102-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
J. For Electrically Operated Valves: Provide electric operator per Section 15135.
K. Valve sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Disk: 316 or 316L stainless steel.
B. Stem: 316 or 316L stainless steel.
C. Body: One piece, cast 316 or 316L stainless steel.
D. Seat: Viton, resilient seat for drip tight shut off.
E. Seat Ring: 316 stainless steel.
F. Stem Nut: Ni-resist.
G. Nut: 316 stainless steel, self Locking.
H. Packing: PTFE.
I. Bonnet: 316 or 316L stainless Steel.
J. Yoke: Cast 316 or 316L Stainless Steel.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
Follow Manufacturer's published instructions.
3.03 FACTORY TESTING
Seat Test: With valve in the closed position, conduct hydrostatic test of the valve seat seals at 1.1 times the maximum rated pressure for 7 minutes. Test each seat independently.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15110-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15110
VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic requirements for valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
2. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15251 - Ductile Iron Piping.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.21 - Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
2. B16.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
3. A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
4. E 527 - Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys (UNS).
C. American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA):
1. C 111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe Fittings.
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C 504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
E. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
1. SP 2 - Surface Preparation Specification for Hand Tool Cleaning.
2. SP10 - Surface Preparation Specification for Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pressure Rating:
1. Suitable for service under minimum working pressures of 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
2. When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to withstand the test pressure.
B. Valve to Piping Connections:
1. Valves 3 Inch Nominal Size and Larger: Flanged ends.
2. Valves less than 3 Inch Nominal Size: Screwed ends.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15110-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Prior to Installation:
1. Product Data: Submit detailed technical information relating to the valve including description of component parts, materials of construction, performance, dimensions, and weights.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for each type of valve 4 inch in nominal size and larger. Include information on valve operators in operation and maintenance instruction manual.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Valves: Manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful operational experience in comparable service.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation; repair coating where damaged.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 15050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS Alloy S31600 or S30400.
B. Valve, Gate, and Operator Bolts and Nuts:
1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions:
a. Submerged in sewage or water.
b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water.
c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls. d. At openings in concrete or metal decks.
2. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers.
3. Underground Bolts: Low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C 111/A21.11.
C. Bronze and Brass Alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise.
D. Valve Bodies: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A 126 Class 30 minimum or ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless specified otherwise.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15110-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2.02 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Provide valves with type of protective coating specified in the particular valve specification.
B. Apply protective coating to interior, non-working surfaces, except stainless steel surfaces.
C. Coating Types:
1. Powder Epoxies:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) 3-M Company, Scotchcoat.
2) Michigan Chrome and Chemical Company, Micron 650 or 651. b. Clean surfaces to meet SSPC-SP-10, near-white metal blast cleaning, with grit of size recommended by epoxy manufacturer.
c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. d. Coating Thickness: 0.010 to 0.012 inches except that:
1) Coating Thickness in Grooves for Gaskets: 0.005 inches. 2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat. e. Quality Control:
1) Coating Thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type thickness gauge.
2) Verify coating integrity with a wet sponge testing unit operating at approximately 60 volts.
3) Consider tests successful when coating thickness meets specified requirements and when no pin holes are found.
4) Correct defective coating disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat test.
5) Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of the epoxy used for coating.
2. High Solids Polyamine Cured Epoxy:
a. Product: As specified in Section 09960.
b. Quality Control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts.
1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. 2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are corrected.
2.03 UNDERGROUND VALVES
A. Provide underground valves with flanged, mechanical, or other type of joint required for the type of pipe to which the valve is to be connected.
B. Coating and Wrapping:
1. Prior to installation, coat buried valves with 2 coats of protective coal tar in accordance with Section 09960.
2. After installation, wrap valves with polyethylene as specified for ductile iron piping in Section 15251.
a. Ascertain that polyethylene wrapping does not affect operation of valve.
2.04 STEAM VALVES
A. Valves in Steam or Steam Condensate Piping: Ductile iron body in accordance with ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum or cast steel or forged steel.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15110-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2.05 VALVE BOXES
A. Provide cast-iron valve boxes at each buried valve to access valve and valve operators.
B. Do not support boxes on valve, valve operator, or pipe.
C. Boxes:
1. 2-piece, fabricated of cast-iron; provide cover, with asphalt varnish or enamel protective coating.
2. Adjustable to grade, install centered around the upper portions of the valve and valve operator.
D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Tyler Pipe Industries, Inc.
2. Neenah Foundry Company.
2.06 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Valve Operator "Open" Direction: Open counterclockwise.
B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key operation or floor stands and handwheels.
C. Provide manually operated valves and gates located not more than 6 feet above the operating level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels.
1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves, located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward the operating side.
2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case, stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or receptacle.
D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated handles or valve wheels.
1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating level.
2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide hold-backs or other means for keeping the chains out of the way.
E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finish grade or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide 2 inch square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover where a box is not required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation: Required Information Prior to Installation:
1. Install valves after the required submittal on installation has been accepted.
2. Determine, after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the faceto-face dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15110-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases, blocking, and protective coating.
B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances:
1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of the particular equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR.
2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or change initiated by CONTRACTOR.
C. Install Valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as follows:
1. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, ball valves, and angle valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position.
2. Buried plug valves with geared operators shall be installed with their stems in a horizontal position.
D. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from fully open to fully closed.
E. Place top of valve boxes flush with finish grade or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
F. Valves with Threaded Connections:
1. Install valves by applying wrench on end of valve nearest the joint to prevent distortion of the valve body.
2. Apply pipe joint compound and Teflon tape on external (male) threads to prevent forcing compound into valve seat area.
G. Valves with Flanged Connections:
1. Align flanges and gasket carefully before tightening flange bolts.
2. When flanges are aligned, install bolts and hand tighten.
3. Tighten nuts opposite each other with equal tension before moving to next pair of nuts.
H. Valves with Soldered Connections:
1. Do not overheat connection to prevent damage to resilient seats and metal seat rings.
2. Position valves in full open position before starting soldering procedure.
3. Apply heat to piping rather than to valve body.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15111-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15111
BALL VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Metal body ball valves and plastic body ball valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 13445B - Pneumatic Controllers and Control Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C 507 Standard for Ball Valves 6 Inch Through 48 Inch.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings use:
1. Metal body ball valves on metal pipelines,
2. Plastic body ball valves on plastic pipelines,
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Certifications:
1. Metal Body Ball Valves: Submit affidavit of compliance with AWWA C 507.
2. Sludge Cake Ball Valves: Submit affidavit of satisfactory completion of shell test and seat test.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 15050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL BODY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Lunkenheimer Company.
2. MARPAC, Inc.
B. General.
1. Type: Non-lubricated, and capable of sealing in either flow direction.
2. Conform to AWWA C 507.
3. Stem Packing: Manually adjustable while valve is under pressure.
4. Temperature Limits: Suitable for operation between minus 20 and 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Materials:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15111-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Valves in Copper Lines: Bronze body with solder ends.
2. Valves in Ductile Iron Piping: Ductile iron or cast steel bodies
3. Valves in Stainless Steel Piping: 316 Stainless steel bodies and ball.
4. Ends as follows:
a. Threaded for sizes 3 inch and smaller.
b. Flanged for sizes larger than 3 inch.
5. Ball: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
6. Seats: TFE.
7. Stem Seals: TFE or Viton.
2.02 PLASTIC BODY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Asahi America.
2. Chemtrol Division, NIBCO Inc.
B. General:
1. Type: Non-lubricated and capable of sealing in either flow direction.
2. End Connections: True union.
3. Operator Handle: Lever.
C. Materials:
1. Body: Chlorinated Polyvinyl chloride (CPVC).
2. Ball: Chlorinated Polyvinyl chloride (CPVC).
3. Seats: TFE (Teflon).
4. O-rings: Viton
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's published instructions.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15115-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15115
GATE, GLOBE, AND ANGLE VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Gate, globe, angle, plug disc and plain hose valves, and yard hydrants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 15110 - Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B 98 - Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C 500 - Standard for Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service (includes addendum C500a-95).
2. C 509 - Standard for Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service (includes addendum C509a-95).
1.03 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 15050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves Aboveground:
1. Valves less than 3 Inches in Size for Clean Water and Air Service: Manufacturer's standard bronze, solid wedge disc, rising stem, screwed end, Class 150 pounds. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, Figure 431.
2) Jenkins, Figure 47.
3) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure 2151.
2. Valves 3 Inches in Size and Larger: Flanged 200 pound iron body; bronze mounted; outside screw and yoke (OS&Y); double disc; parallel seat; with stems of silicon bronze in accordance with ASTM B 98, Alloy No. C 66100; and handwheel. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) M&H Valve Company, Figure 68-02.
2) Mueller, A-2483-6.
B. Gate Valves Underground:
1. Valves 3 Inches through 12 Inches in Size for Underground Service: Iron body, resilient seat, non-rising stem, double O-ring stem seal, in accordance with AWWA C 509.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) M&H Valve Company.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15115-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 2) Mueller Company.
2. Valves 14 Inch Size and Larger for Underground Service: Double disc, parallel seat, iron body, bronze mounted, non-rising stem (NRS) in accordance with AWWA C 500.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) M&H Valve Company.
2) Mueller Company.
C. Steam and Condensate Gate Valves:
1. Valves 3 Inches and Smaller in Size: Bronze, screwed, rising stem, solid wedge, screwed bonnet, suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge, steam working pressure (SWP). a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, No. 428.
2) Jenkins, Figure 47U.
3) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure 2127.
2. Valves Larger than 3 Inches in Size: Suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge, steam working pressure (SWP), flanged, iron body, bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y). a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane No. 465-1/2.
2) Jenkins, Figure 651C.
3) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure 1430.
D. Stainless Steel Knife Gate Valves for FOG service
1. Size: 4 inch
2. Cast 316 stainless steel body and packing gland
3. 316 Stainless steel gate and stem.
4. 304 Stainless steel Yoke.
5. Bi-directional resilient seated valve.
6. Seat material: EPDM to 250°F.
7. Pressure rating 150 psi. C.W.P.
8. Lug connections.
9. Actuator: Stainless Steel Manual lever.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal
1) Dezurik KGN-RSB
2) Valtorc Series 4200
3) Velan
2.02 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES
A. General Purpose Globe and Angle Valves:
1. Valves 3 inches and smaller:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal except in welded steel piping:
1) Crane, No. 1 Globe or No. 2 Angle.
2) Lunkenheimer Company Figure No. 2140 Globe or No. 2141 Angle. b. Design:
1) Valve: Class 125 threaded ends, rated for 250 degrees Fahrenheit at pressure of 170 pounds per square inch.
c. In Welded Steel Piping: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, No. 351.
2) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure No. 1123; or equal with flanged ends.
2. Valves Larger than 3 Inches:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15115-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 1) Crane, No. 351.
2) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure No. 1123.
3. Plug Disc Globe Valves:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Crane, No. 212P or No. 384P.
2) Lunkenheimer Company, 72-PS or 73-PS1.
b. Plug disc globe or angle valves specified in the Specifications or indicated on the Drawings for throttling or for severe service: Iron body stainless steel trimmed plug type seat and disc.
4. Needle Valves:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Powell, Figure No. 180.
2) Lunkenheimer Company, Figure No. 906-BS or No. 907-BS. 3) Crane No. 88 or No. 89.
b. Valves for Metering: As recommended by the meter manufacturer and furnished with the meters.
5. Globe or Angle Hose Valves:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Globe Threaded Valve: One of the following or equal:
a) Crane, No. 7TF.
b) Stockham, Figure No. B22T.
2) Angle Threaded Valve: One of the following or equal:
a) Crane, No. 17TF.
b) Stockham, Figure No. B222T.
b. Design:
1) Valve: Globe or angle valve with threaded ends size 1/8 inch to 3 inches in diameter, size as indicated on the Drawings.
2) Disc: Renewable, made of teflon or Buna-N.
3) Class 150 threaded ends, rate for 200 degrees Fahrenheit at a pressure of 270 pounds per square inch.
6. Freezeless Yard Hydrant:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Josam, Series 71700.
2) Zurn, Z-1385.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves in accordance with Section 15110.
B. Mount yard hydrants on iron pipe risers minimum 1 inch nominal diameter or size indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15120-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Piping specialties including:
1. Flexible rubber connections.
2. Pipe saddles.
3. Tapping sleeves.
4. Surge cushions.
5. Sight glasses.
6. Pressure gauges.
7. Thermometers.
8. Mechanical Variable Area Vane Type Flow Meters
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 11388 - Digester Gas Manometers.
2. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME).
B. American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association (ANSI/AWWA):
1. ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 - Ductile-iron Compact Fittings.
2. ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-iron and Gray-iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
3. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-iron and Gray-iron Fittings.
4. ANSI/AWWA C213 - Fusion-bonded Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines.
5. ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1. ASTM A148 - Specification for steel castings, high- Strength, for Structural Purposes.
2. ASTM A536 - Specification For Ductile Iron Castings.
D. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Assemblies:
1. Manufacturer's certificate attesting successful performance of specified steam test.
2. Shop drawings detailing dimensions and materials.
3. Manufacturer's published installation instructions.
4. Operation and maintenance manuals.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15120-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Expansion Joints and Vibration Control Joints:
1. Protect joint bellows and sliding surfaces against damage during packing, shipping and installation, and also during pressure test.
2. Lock expansion joints against movement until pressure tests are completed.
3. Replace damaged expansion joints with new and undamaged expansion joints.
B. Ball-Type Flexible Expansion Joints:
1. Protect joint bellows and sliding surfaces against damage during packing, shipping, and installation.
2. Lock expansion joints against movement until installation is completed.
3. Do not repair but discard damaged expansion joints and in their place provide new and undamaged flexible expansion joints.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish 4 complete spare sets of gaskets for each size and type of ball joint.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 15050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLEXIBLE RUBBER CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Proco Products Inc., style 320.
B. Provide flexible rubber connections with neoprene cover and natural rubber tube with full faced flanged ends suitable to withstand an operating pressure of 250 pounds per square inch gauge.
C. Provide complete flexible rubber connections, including galvanized retaining rings and control rods.
2.02 PIPE SADDLES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. BTR Inc./Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 317.
2. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 202S.
B. Materials:
1. Pipe Saddles: Ductile iron.
2. Straps, Bolts, and Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel with Teflon coating on nuts.
3. Gaskets: EPDM.
2.03 TAPPING SLEEVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. BTR Inc./Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 622.
2. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FTS 420.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15120-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set B. Materials:
1. Tapping Sleeves: Steel construction.
2. Bolts and Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel.
3. Nuts: Teflon coated.
4. Gaskets: EPDM.
5. Size of Tapped Boss: As indicated on the Drawings.
2.04 SIGHT GLASSES
A. Assembly: Body casting with ANSI standard adapter flanges, Pyrex glass section, cleaning assembly with scalloped neoprene wipers, operating rod and handle, packing gland with packing and suitable adapter, and cock with solvent hand pump.
B. Suitable for a minimum pressure of 30 pounds per square inch gauge.
C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. EIMCO Process Machinery Division of Envirotech Corporation.
2. Ernst, Type K2 or K3 Cleanable Sight Glass.
2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Design:
1. Provide dual-range, liquid filled gauges with ranges as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Size: As follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified:
a. For 1 Inch Pipe and Larger: 4-1/2 inch diameter.
b. For Smaller than 1 Inch Pipe: 2-1/2 inch diameter.
3. Provide gauges with back flanged aluminum cases with threaded ring, except for panel mounting, in which case provide gauge with front flanged aluminum case with threaded ring. Apply black epoxy coating to cases.
4. Provide case fitted with a rupture disc which shall relieve out the back of the case.
5. Window: Shatterproof glass or high temperature acrylic.
6. Provide gauges with Type 316 stainless steel socket and bellows or bourdon tube, depending on pressure range.
a. Where the maximum pressure is less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch the gauge shall use bellows as the measuring element. b. Where the maximum pressure is greater than 15 pounds per square inch, the measuring element shall be a bourdon tube.
7. Socket Tips:
a. Socket Tips for Bellows and Bourdon Tube: Type 316 Stainless steel. b. Size: 1/2 inch for 4-1/2 inch diameter gauges, 1/4 inch for 2-1/2 inch diameter gauges.
8. Mount gauges on diaphragm seals where indicated on the Drawings. a. Provide diaphragm seals with Type 316 stainless steel top housing, bottom housing, and bolt assemblies.
1) Bottom housing shall be fitted with a 1/4 inch flushing connection. 2) This flushing connection shall be fitted with a Type 316 stainless steel close nipple and a brass shutoff cock.
3) Diaphragm Seal: Removable.
a) For pressure less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch, provide viton diaphragm seal.
b) For pressures greater than 15 pounds per square inch, provide Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm seal.
b. Fit diaphragm seal gauge assembly with a snubber.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15120-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set 1) Snubber shall have porous metal disc sized to dampen pressure fluctuations in the filled system.
2) Snubber: Stainless steel.
3) Snubber filter disc shall be sized to prevent the gauge from pulsating. c. Provide diaphragm seal gauge assemblies filled with silicon.
9. Pressure gauges, except gauges with diaphragm seals, shall have pulsation dampeners installed between the gauge and the shut-off valve. a. Pulsation Dampeners: Stainless steel.
10. Mount gauges on pressure ring where indicated on the Drawings. a. Suitable for sludge, fats, oils, grease, and food waste materials. b. Design:
1) Full port design rated for 300 psig.
2) Sense pressure on 360 degrees around the inner ring. 3) Prevent plugging or fouling of sensor.
4) All areas exposed to process fluid covered with elastomer. 5) Bolt Through or Flange connection to Pipe Flange.
6) Drill to 125#/150# ANSI standard.
c. Materials:
1) Sensor Body: stainless steel.
2) Body Trim: Stainless Steel.
3) Flexible Liner / Diaphragm: EPDM
B. Manufacturers:
1. Pressure Gauges: One of the following or equal:
a. U.S. Gauge Division of Ametek, Inc., Solfrunt Gauges, Figure Number 1931T. b. Dresser Industries, Inc., Ashcroft Figure Number 1379.
2. Pressure Gauges for Digester Gas Systems: One of the following or equal:
a. Dresser Industries, Inc.
b. Ashcroft, Figure 1179 compound gauge.
3. Diaphragm Seal: One of the following or equal:
a. For pressure less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch:
1) Ashcroft, Type 301.
2) Mansfield and Green, Type LG.
b. For pressures greater than 15 pounds per square inch:
1) Ashcroft, Type 101.
2) Mansfield and Green, Type RG.
4. Snubber: One of the following or equal:
a. Chemiquip, Ashcroft.
5. Pulsation Dampeners: One of the following or equal:
a. Dresser Industries, Inc., Ashcroft Figure Number 1106S. b. Operation and Maintenance Specialties, Charlotte, N.C., Ray Pressure Snubbers.
6. Pressure Rings: one of the following or equal.
a. Ashcroft Type 81.
b. Red Valve series 48.
2.06 THERMOMETERS
A. Tube Type Thermometers:
1. 9 inch size with adjustable angle from temperature well.
2. Type 316 stainless steel separable sockets with extension necks on insulated pipes and where indicated on the Drawings.
3. Range indicated on the Drawings.
4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15120-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set a. H.O. Trerice Company, Series BX9.
b. Jay Instruments Company.
B. Bimetallic Type Thermometers:
1. Scales graduated in degrees Fahrenheit.
2. 5 inch diameter dials.
3. Heads capable of being rotated 360 degrees and titled 180 degrees.
4. Type 304 stainless steel construction.
5. Shatterproof glass.
6. Stem length as necessary for the installation conditions; 4 inch minimum.
7. Accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent of full scale with external adjustment.
8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Ametek, U.S. Gauge Division, Figure 6530.
b. Dresser Industries, Ashcroft Instrument Division, EI Everyangle.
2.07 MECHANICAL VARIABLE AREA VANE TYPE FLOW METERS
A. Mechanical variable area vane type flow meter with mechanical display.
1. Universal Flow Monitors MN or LN Series based on flow range.
2. MN series for flows less than 70 gpm.
3. LN series for flows greater than 70 gpm.
4. Maximum pressure drop at maximum flow MN series 5 psig, LN series 3.8 psig.
5. Aluminum housing with nylon bowl, Stainless Steel internal parts, Buna N seals, pressure range 0 to 150 psig and up to 210°F service water temperature.
6. In-line type suitable for mounting vertical or horizontal.
7. Individually calibrated for the service fluid.
8. Display flow in gallons per minute.
9. Flow range as indicated on the Drawings or specified elsewhere.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Expansion and Vibration Control Joints:
1. Prevent equipment vibration transmitted through piping system, and prevent damaging stresses due to normal expansion and contraction with temperature changes in piping and connected equipment.
a. Where anticipated expansion is greater than can be absorbed by the normal piping configuration, install loops, bends, and expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings, to absorb excess expansion.
2. Install expansion joints so as to allow 2-1/4 inch expansion per 100 linear feet of piping.
3. Where possible, install expansion joints adjacent to an anchor, and provide one concentric guide on piping within 12 pipe diameters, but not more than 5 feet, from the end of the joint opposite the anchor.
a. Locate a similar guide approximately 30 diameters but not more than 10 feet from the first.
4. For expansion joints not installed adjacent to an anchor provide 2 concentric guides similarly located at each end of the joint.
5. Provide control rods and additional guides where indicated on the Drawings, but at no greater intervals than recommended by the joint manufacturer in published instructions.
6. Space intermediate supports a minimum of 10 feet, and tack weld the protective saddles to the pipe.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15120-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set B. Expansion Joints for Steam Cleaned Piping:
1. Install no less than one expansion joint in a run of steam cleaned piping which exceeds 20 feet in length. Do not exceed 200 feet in spacing of expansion joints.
2. Install expansion joints in steam cleaned piping between anchors.
C. Expansion Joints for Steam and Hot Water:
1. Install not less than 1 expansion joint in a run of steam or hot water piping which exceeds 20 feet in length. Do not exceed 150 feet spacing of expansion for steam piping and 200 feet for hot water piping.
2. Where possible, install expansion joints adjacent to an anchor; provide piping with 2 concentric guides, the first being within 2 feet of the end of the joint opposite the anchor.
3. At expansion joints not installed adjacent to an anchor, provide 2 concentric guides on piping within 2 feet off both ends of the expansion joint.
4. Lock expansion joint against movement until pressure test is completed.
D. Vibration Control Joints:
1. For piping running to or from mechanical equipment, provide flexible vibration joint at equipment connection.
E. Pipe Saddles:
1. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.
F. Tapping Sleeves:
1. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.
G. Pressure Gauges:
1. Install pressure and compound gauges as indicated on the Drawings, in the Pressure Gauge Schedule, and as specified.
2. Install gauges as specified, and as recommended by the manufacturer in published instructions.
H. Thermometers:
1. Drill and tap piping for the thermometers as generally indicated on the Drawings.
Select final position in the field with the objective of achieving best readability.
I. Mechanical Flow Meters
1. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Orient so flow is easily visible by operators.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Field test gauges with a calibrated test gauge, in the presence of ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 15252
STEEL PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Steel piping, joints, fittings, pipe lining and coating, and fabricated steel piping fittings and specials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings.
2. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. Standard H-20.
B. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME):
1. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.
2. B16.3 - Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300.
3. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
4. B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
5. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Casting.
2. A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
3. A 105 - Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components.
4. A 106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
5. A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
6. A 183 - Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts.
7. A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings.
8. D 297 - Steel Casting, Iron-Chromium and Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Heat-Resistant, for General Application.
9. C 150 - Portland Cement.
10. D 395 - Rubber Property-Compression Set.
11. D 977 - Emulsified Asphalt.
12. D 471 - Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids.
13. D 573 - Rubber Property-Deterioration in an Air Oven.
14. D 412 - Rubber Properties in Tension.
15. D 429 - Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates.
16. D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.
17. D 2240 - Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C 200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger.
2. C 203 - Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water PipelinesEnamel and Tape-Hot Applied.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. C 205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe-4 Inches and Larger-Shop Applied.
4. C 206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
5. C 207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Sizes 4 inches Through 144 inches.
6. C 208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings.
7. C 606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
8. M 11 - Design Manual.
E. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE):
1. RP0274-74 - Standard Recommended Practice.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design Criteria for Pipe and Pipe Fittings: In accordance with AWWA Manual M11 with the following modifications:
a. Wall Thickness: As designed or minimum 1/4 inch for pipe from 12 inches in diameter to, and including, 72 inches in diameter or minimum 5/16 inch for pipe larger than 72 inches in diameter, whichever is thicker. b. Inside Diameter of Unlined Pipe: Nominal.
c. Inside Diameter of Lined Pipe: As measured from face to face of liner, but not less than nominal.
d. Deflection of Underground Pipe Inside Diameter: Maximum 2 percent under trench load of H-20 live load in accordance with AASHTO specifications. e. Working Stress of Steel: Maximum 50 percent of yield stress.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Details of fittings and specials showing thickness and dimensions of plates, detail of welds, and materials; listing of proposed services and locations for use of grooved joint type piping; tabulated layout schedules for cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe.
B. Product Data: Details of fittings and specials showing thickness and dimensions of plates, detail of welds, and materials; grooved joint piping fittings, gaskets, couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, and pipe lining and coating.
C. Certificates of Compliance: Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe.
D. Design Calculations: Wall thicknesses for external loading, special loading and internal pressure.
E. Mill certificates.
F. Test Reports: Rubber gaskets.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable Standards:
1. Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe shall conform to the following standards, as complemented and modified herein:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
a. Steel Pipe: AWWA C 200.
b. Cement-Mortar Lining and Coating: AWWA C 205.
c. Fittings and Specials: AWWA C 208.
d. Reinforcement of Fittings and Specials: AWWA M 11.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Pipe:
1. Type, Pipe 6 inches and Smaller: ASTM A 53, black or galvanized, seamless or straight seam electric resistance welded. Minimum Schedule 40.
2. Type, from 6 to 12 inches: ASTM A 53, black or galvanized pipe, seamless or straight seam electric resistance welded. Minimum Schedule 20.
3. Type, Larger than 12 inches: AWWA C 200, without butt strap, riveted, or swaged joints; wall thickness as specified in Design Requirements.
4. Type, 24 inches and Larger, with Grooved Type Couplings and Wall Thickness less than 1/2 inch: Provided with stub ends, sized as follows, for grooves. a. Thickness: As recommended by coupling manufacturer, but not less than 1/2 inch.
b. Length: Width of coupling plus 1 inch, but not less than 6 inches.
5. Type for Liquid or Gaseous Dry Chlorine: ASTM A 106, Grade A, Schedule 80, assembled with 300 pounds per square inch malleable iron fittings and ammonia type flanges.
B. Steel Pipe Fittings:
1. Screwed Fittings:
a. Malleable Iron: ANSI/ASTM B16.3, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe.
b. Cast Iron Drainage: ANSI/ASTM B16.12; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe.
2. Flanged Fittings:
a. Type for 12 inch and Smaller Pipe: ANSI/ASTM B16.1, cast iron or ductile iron, 125 pounds; or ANSI/ASTM B16.5, steel, 150 pounds, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe. b. Type for Larger than 12 inch Pipe: ANSI/ASTM B16.5, steel, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe; or AWWA C 207 and AWWA C 208, fabricated from flanges and steel pipe, respectively.
c. Companion Flanges for 4 inches and Smaller Pipe: ANSI/ASTM B16.1, cast iron or ductile iron, 125 pounds; ANSI/ASTM B16.5, steel, 150 pounds, slip-on or welding neck; or ammonia type for use on chlorine liquid or gas piping.
d. Companion Flanges for Larger than 4 inch to and Including 12 inch Pipe:
ANSI/ASTM B16.5, slip-on or welding neck type.
e. Companion Flanges for Larger than 12 inch Pipe: ANSI/ASTM B16.5, steel, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 where used with galvanized pipe; or AWWA C 207, steel plate or raised hub type. f. Weld flanges to pipe or fittings before applying lining. g. Machine flanges or provide tapered filler for changes in grade or to slope lines for drainage.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
h. Flange Bolts: ANSI/ASTM B16.1 for typical applications; or Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, or Everdur for underground or underwater applications.
1) Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside face or nut after assembly.
2) Tap holes for cap screws or stub bolts when used.
i. Gaskets: In accordance with Section 15052.
3. Welding Fittings:
a. Welding Fittings for Piping 8 inches and less in Nominal Diameter: Buttwelding fittings in accordance with ANSI/ASTM B16.9, standard wall or standard weight.
b. Welding Fittings for Piping Larger than 8 inches in Nominal Diameter: Buttwelding fittings in accordance with ANSI/ASTM B16.9, or, at the option of the CONTRACTOR, made up out of sections of pipe welded together, except where smooth bends are indicated for air lines.
c. Fittings made up of sections of pipe welded together shall be made of pipe of at least the same wall thickness as the pipe with which used, and bends shall be miter bends, fabricated in accordance with AWWA C 208 and as supplemented by AWWA Manual M 11. Welding of these made-up fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C 206.
1) Design and fabricate outlets and 4 branch fittings in accordance with AWWA Manual M 11.
2) Bends may be welded to adjacent pipe sections.
a) Bends shall be manufactured of the following number of pieces:
b) Bends from 0 to 30 degrees angle, 2 pieces.
c) Bends from 30 to 45 degrees angle, 3 pieces.
d) Bends from 45 to 67-1/2 degrees angle, 4 pieces.
e) Bends from 67-1/2 to 90 degrees angle, 5 pieces.
4. Grooved Joint Fittings:
a. Fittings for Grooved Joint Steel Piping: Rigid-grooved type, and as follows:
1) Grooves: Cut; rolled grooves are not acceptable.
2) Couplings: Cast in 2 or more segments of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47, Grade 32510.
3) Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 183, Grade 2.
4) Gaskets: Composition water-sealing designed so that the internal piping pressure serves to increase the seal's
watertightness.
5) Gaskets for water service and oil-free air systems at temperatures less than 230 degrees Fahrenheit shall be made of ethylene propylene diene monomers (EPDM) in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Line Call Out 2CA615A25B24.
6) Gaskets for use with cement-mortar lined steel piping shall be captured between the ends of the pipe to protect exposed metal from corrosion, and shall be made of nitrile in accordance with ASTM D 2000, Line Call Out 2CA615A25B24.
7) Perform grooving of the pipe wall only on standard or heavier schedule weight pipe.
a) For pipe with wall thickness less than standard weight, weld a ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
shouldered end on the pipe in accordance with AWWA C 606. b) Fabricated pipe, pipe conforming to AWWA C 200, shall have shouldered ends welded onto the pipe.
c) Shoulder: Type B or D in accordance with AWWA C 606. 8) Couplings and Grooving: As manufactured by Gustin-Bacon Piping Products, Victaulic Company of America, or equal.
b. Fittings for Grooved Joint Piping: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47, Grade 32510, and as follows:
1) Where cast fittings are not made, standard fittings including large diameter elbows shall be made of forged steel conforming with ASTM A 105, Grade B with 0.375 inch wall thickness, or shall be standard segmentally welded fittings fabricated of Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe.
a) Grooves: As manufactured by Gustin-Bacon Piping Products, Victaulic Company of America, or equal.
2) Fittings for grooved joint piping shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the grooved joint material.
3) Fittings for grooved joint piping shall be for rigid-grooved type joints. 4) Connection to flanged units shall be by means of flange to grooved joint adapters.
a) Where the flanged to grooved joint adapters interfere with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps, or other items, the connection shall be by means of a spool with one end flanged and the other grooved, long enough to prevent interference with adjacent valves, pumps, or other items.
C. Steel Pipe Lining and Coating:
1. General:
a. Except where otherwise specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings, lining and coating for steel pipe shall be as specified hereinafter.
b. Pipe Coating:
1) Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide underground steel piping with one of the coatings specified hereinafter.
2) Extend pipe coating for underground piping 6 inches above finish grade or finish floor, and neatly terminate.
3) Field paint aboveground steel pipe as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
2. Cement-mortar Lining and Coating:
a. Lining:
1) Shop apply cement-mortar lining for steel pipe, interior, in accordance with AWWA C 205; or, at the option of CONTRACTOR, field apply with a pipe lining machine.
b. Coating:
1) Cement-mortar Coating for Steel Pipe Exterior: In accordance with AWWA C 205, modified as follows:
a) Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, low alkali.
b) Sand: AWWA C 205 except that the total percentage of deleterious material shall not exceed 3 percent.
3. Coal-Tar Enamel Lining:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
a. Coal-tar enamel lining for interior of steel pipe: In accordance with AWWA C 203.
4. Coal-Tar Epoxy Lining:
a. Coal-tar Epoxy Lining for Interior of Steel Pipe: Epoxy bituminous coating as specified for submerged metal in Section 09960, High Performance Coatings.
b. Polyurethane Lining for Interior of Steel Pipe: Polyurethane as specified for submerged metal in Section 09960, High Performance Coatings.
5. Plastic Tape Wrap:
a. Plastic tape wrap for exterior of steel piping shall consist of a prime coat followed with spirally applied tape layers to a minimum system thickness of 80 mils.
b. Plastic Tape Wrap Coating: Plastic tape wrap for exterior of steel pipe, fittings and specials shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C209 and AWWA C214 as applicable.
6. General: The tape coating system shall consist of primer, one layer of 20 mil inner wrap, one layer of 30 mil outer wrap and a second layer of 30 mil outer wrap, for a total coating thickness of 80 mils. All materials shall be of products of the same manufacturer.
a. Primer: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 1029 or 1039 Primer. 2) The Tapecoat Company, TC Omniprime Primer.
b. Pipe Wrap:
1) First Wrap: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
a) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 989-20 (932-50 for fittings). b) The Tapecoat Company, Tapecoat 1020B.
2) Middle Wrap: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
a) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 955-30.
b) The Tapecoat Company, Tapecoat 2030B.
3) Finish Wrap: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
a) Polyken Pipeline Coatings, Number 956-30 White.
b) The Tapecoat Company, Tapecoat CT 2030B.
7. Filler Tape:
a. Polyken 939.
b. or equal.
8. Joint Wrap:
a. Polyken 932-50, white Hi-Tack Joint Wrap tape.
b. Tapecoat Company, Joint Tape.
9. Application on Welded Joints:
a. Remove sharp edges of weld spatter and slag wit a file or ball peen hammer before wrapping joints.
b. Apply plastic tape wrap in accordance with AWWA C-209. 1) Clean and prime all surfaces, then apply a wrap of 0.125 thick by 2 inch wide filler tape centered on the weld. Push and knead the tape into all voids.
c. Apply two wraps of 30 mil joint tape; or the tape may be half lapped to obtain the double thickness.
d. Finish Wrap: Apply final wrapping in same manner.
e. Wrap fittings, valves, and other odd shaped components in the pipeline with first and finish wrapping over the prime coat , total thickness of tape 80 mils.
10. Extruded Coatings:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
a. Coat pipe with a film of high density polyethylene, plant extruded onto the pipe over a thermoplastic adhesive primer.
1) Coating Thickness: In accordance with the extruder's standards but not less than 6 pounds per diameter inch per 100 feet of pipe. 2) Coating: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Plexco (Pipe Line Service Co.).
b) Extrucoat.
D. Rubber Lined Piping:
1.General:
a. Rubber lined piping for abrasion resistant services: Black steel piping conforming to ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, lined as specified herein.
2.Fittings and Couplings:
a. Fittings: Grooved joint type, machined for rubber lining. b. Couplings: Grooved type.
3.Lining Material:
a. Rubber for Rubber Lined Piping: Neoprene compounded to provide maximum resistance to abrasion, temperature variations, and aging, and shall have a Durometer A hardness of 60 within 5.
4. Lining Application:
a. Preparation:
1) Immediately before application of adhesive for rubber lining, sandblast metal surfaces to obtain a bright, clean, and dry surface. 2) The interior of the piping shall be free of sunken seams or other defects that may detract from the rubber lining quality. b. Application:
1) Prepare the metal and apply the lining to provide a uniform thickness of rubber and a uniform finished diameter.
a) Rubber Lining: Not less than 1/4 inch thick, applied to provide a smooth and continuous surface.
b) Apply such that lining does not have circumferential seams. 2) Return rubber lining at ends of pipe and openings in fittings over the end as recommended by the lining manufacturer.
3) Apply rubber lining in a manner that provides continuous and uninterrupted adhesion to the piping walls.
a) Air pockets, blisters, and similar defects shall be cause for rejection of the item wherein such defects are found.
5.Testing Lining Adhesion:
a. Testing for adhesion: In accordance with ASTM D 429, Method B. 1) Conduct pull test with not less than 35 pounds at 45 degree angle. b. Do not install items which fail the pull test.
E. Fabricated Steel Piping Fittings and Specials:
1.General: Specified herein are the design and fabrication of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials, which include elbows, branches, nozzles, manifolds, headers, heads, collars, stiffeners, reinforcements, and other steel fabrications relating to steel piping, but shall not include steel pipe.
2. Design:
a. CONTRACTOR shall design and detail fittings and specials. 1) Design: In accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA Manual M 11, as complemented and modified herein.
2) Nozzles: Reinforced in conformance with recommended practice in ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-8 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
AWWA M 11, Steel Pipe Manual.
3) Design reinforcing for fittings and specials for the specified test pressure.
4) Fittings shall conform in dimension to AWWA C 208, complemented with the provisions specified herein.
5) The working stress for steel used for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield stress.
b. The thickness of pipe, large elbows, and headers, except header nozzles, shall be the thicker of:
1) The thickness designed in accordance with the design methods specified in the preceding paragraph “Fabricated Steel Piping Fittings and Specials.”
2) The thickness indicated on the Drawings.
3) The following thicknesses:
a) For Pipes Smaller than 72 inches in Diameter: Minimum 1/4 inch.
b) For Pipes 72 inches in Diameter and Larger: Minimum 5/16 inch.
c. Elbows shall be of the number of pieces specified under paragraph Steel Pipe Fittings, “Welding and Fittings”, and thickness of material shall conform to thickness of pipe or manifold shells specified. d. Ends of fittings to be welded to pipe shall be beveled for welding.
3. Fabrication:
a. Shop fabricate steel piping fittings and specials in units as long as practicable for safe hauling and installation. Minimize number of field welds.
b. Fabricate fittings and specials to uniform lengths with proper end clearance for the specified types of joint or attachment. c. Fabricate fittings and specials to allow field assembly without cutting or special work.
d. Where specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Pipes and Pipe Fittings, or indicated on the Drawings, the inside of fabricated steel manifolds and other fittings and specials shall receive a cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C 205.
1) Reinforce lining for piping 24 inches in diameter and larger with wire fabric.
e. Do not weld flanges to nozzles until the nozzles and reinforcements are completely welded to the header.
1) Accurately space and align flanges so that when connections have been made there will be no stress on the header, piping, or equipment. Properly locate and align equipment.
4. Dished Heads:
a. Dished Heads on 84 inch Diameter and Smaller Manifolds: 1 piece (seamless) spherically dished (torispherical) heads.
1) Larger heads may be seamed.
b. Dish Radius: Same dimension as the outside diameter of the head measured at skirt.
c. Skirt Face Length: Not less than 3 inches.
d. Design heads in conformance with recommended practice in AWWA M 11, Steel Pipe Manual.
5.Testing: No shop testing will be required for manifolds or piping connected thereto.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-9 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
F. Steel Pipe, Cement-mortar Lined and Coated:
1.General:
a. Applicable Standards: Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe shall conform to the standards specified in Part 1 of this Section. b. Identification Marks: Provide identification marks in compliance with AWWA C 200. These marks shall be stenciled or otherwise shown at the top of the piping items exterior, including the following information:
1) Name or trademark of the manufacturer.
2) Date of manufacture of the item.
3) Internal diameter in inches.
4) Number of the item, sequential from initial to end station. c. Diameter Designation: The pipe diameter specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings shall be the clear inside diameter after application of the cement-mortar lining with a tolerance of plus 0 inch and minus 1/4 inch.
2. Design:
a. Pipe and fittings shall be designed by CONTRACTOR.
b. Design: In accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA Manual M 11, as complemented and modified herein.
c. Thicknesses of Pipe, Fittings and Specials Shall Be the Thicker Of:
1) The thickness designed in accordance with the design methods specified in the preceding Subparagraph 2.
2) The thickness indicated on the Drawings.
3) The following thicknesses:
a) For pipes 26 inches and less in nominal diameter, not less than 1/4 inch.
b) For pipes more than 26 inches and less than 38 inches in nominal diameter, not less than 5/16 inch.
c) For pipes 38 inches to and including 54 inches in nominal diameter, not less than 3/8 inch.
d. The working stress for steel used for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield stress.
e. Break longitudinal and girth seams for straight seam pipe shall be no greater in number than would be required for the fabrication of pipe with 96 inch by 120 inch steel plates.
1) Break longitudinal seams at the girth seams.
f. Calculate earth loads using the following formula:
1) W = [X] x H x B
2) wherein the various terms shall have the following meaning:
3) W:Earth load, pounds per linear foot of pipe.
4) H:Height of fill over the pipe, feet.
5) B:Outside diameter of the pipe, feet.
6) x: Mathematical symbol for multiplication.
g. Add AASHTO's H-20 loading to earth loads.
h. Design pipe, fittings and specials for a deflection, under external loads, not to exceed 2 percent of the diameter.
1) Stiffness computations shall not consider the effect of the cementmortar lining and coating. 2) Calculate deflection using the Spangler formula and the following ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-10 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
values:
a) Bedding constant K = 0.100.
b) Modulus of soil reaction E' = 700 pounds per square inch. c) Deflection lag constant D1 = 1.00.
i. Where piping is designated to be flanged or welded in order to restrain thrust, the design of the cylinder and flange or welded joint shall take into account the effect of stresses caused by thrust loads.
j. Steel cylinder shall be subject to no more than the lesser of 15,000 pounds per square inch or 50 percent of the steel yield stress.
3. Materials:
a. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, low alkali.
b. Gaskets shall be as specified in Section 15052 and meet the following requirements:
1) Minimum tensile strength, tested in accordance with ASTM D 412, between 2,000 and 2,700 pounds per square inch.
2) Minimum elongation, tested in accordance with ASTM D 412, between 350 and 400 percent.
3) Shore A durometer hardness, tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240, between 50 and 65.
4) Specific gravity, tested in accordance with ASTM D 297, between
0.90 and 1.50.
5) Maximum compression set, tested in accordance with Method B of ASTM D 395, 20 percent.
6) Maximum tension strength loss, tested in accordance with ASTM D 573 at 96 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 20 percent. 7) Maximum elongation loss, tested in accordance with ASTM D 573 at 96 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 20 percent.
8) Maximum absorption, tested in accordance with ASTM D 471 at 48 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 5 percent.
4. Fabrication:
a. Joints: Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide bell and spigot type joints with rubber gaskets. 1) Bell and Spigot Rings: Rolled Carnegie shape M-3516. b. Flanges: AWWA C 207, Class D, steel ring, and as follows:
1) Match pipe flanges to the valve flanges.
a) At flanged joints connecting to valves, provide a steel pipe section without rod reinforcing and not less than 24 inches in length.
b) Apply cement-mortar lining and coating to the steel pipe section. c. Shop Coat of Primer: Flanges and portions of pipe not covered with cement-mortar shall be given a shop coating of primer.
d. Bend Radii of Fittings: Not less than 2.5 times the nominal diameter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Joints:
1. Steel pipe joints shall be screwed, welded, flanged, grooved, or made with flexible joints. The type of joint for piping is specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052.
2. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-11 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
couplings, flanged joints, and other types of joints or means necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052, pipe joints shall be as follows:
a. Pipe smaller than 2 inches in nominal diameter shall have screwed joints or flexible couplings.
b. Pipe 2 inches to 4 inches in nominal diameter shall have screwed joints, flanged joints, welded joints, or joints made with flexible couplings. c. Pipe larger than 4 inches in nominal diameter shall have flanged joints, welded joints, or joints made with flexible couplings.
B. Screwed Joints:
1. Perform threading with clean, sharp dies.
a. Wavy, rough, or otherwise defective pipe threads are not acceptable.
2. Make screwed joints tight and clean with an application of Teflon tape or approved paste compound applied to the male threads only, except as follows:
a. Make up liquid and dry chlorine lines, and liquefied petroleum gas lines, with litharge and glycerine.
3. Provide railroad type unions with bronze-to-iron seat, galvanized where used with galvanized pipe.
a. Flanged joints may be used instead of unions.
C. Flanged Joints:
1. In flanged joints, flanges shall come together at the proper orientation with no air gaps between the flanges after the gaskets are in place.
2. Attach slip-on flanges to pipe by two fillet welds, in accordance with AWWA C 207.
3. Secure welding neck flanges with full penetration butt welds without backing rings.
a. After welding in place, the faces of flanges shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe, or, in the case of fittings, at the proper angle to each other, and bolt holes shall be in proper alignment.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Welded joints shall be electric welded in accordance with AWWA C 206.
2. Welders shall be qualified pursuant to the provisions of AWWA C 206. a. Welders' testing shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense, including cost of test nipples, welding rods, and equipment.
3. Do not weld galvanized pipe.
E. Grooved Joints:
1. Piping with grooved joints shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings and may be installed in place of flanged piping and screwed piping, except that grooved joint piping shall not be used in the following installations:
a. In underground and underwater installations.
b. In piping subject to test pressures of 150 pounds per square inch gauge, or more.
c. In steam and gas piping.
d. In sludge and scum piping designed to be steam cleaned.
2. Assemble in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
3. Support grooved-end pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, provide at least 1 support between consecutive ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-12 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
couplings.
F. Lining and Coating:
1. Field paint aboveground steel pipe as specified in Section 09960, High Performance Coatings.
2. Field applied cement-mortar lining shall be of the same density, smoothness, and thickness as shop applied lining, and shall conform to applicable portions of AWWA C 602.
3. Plastic tape wrap application procedures shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
a. Apply primer with brush, without runs and drips.
b. Lap wrapping not less than 1/2 inch. A single wrap lapped 50 percent or more will not be acceptable.
c. Application on Welded Joints:
1) Remove sharp edges of weld spatter and slag with a file or ball peen hammer before wrapping welded joints.
2) Apply a single thickness of tape base wrap over the primer, around the weld.
3) Start first wrapping 4 inches back on the pipe wrap, spiral wrap tape over the joint holding the proper tension and overlap, and finish 4 inches back on the pipe wrap on the other side of the joint. 4) Apply final wrapping in same manner.
d. Wrap fittings, valves, and other odd shaped components in the pipeline with first and finish wrapping over the prime coat.
e. Wrap joints, fittings, valves, and other irregular shapes of piping with extruded coatings with tape as specified in this Subparagraph.
4. Protect lining of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials during hauling, installation, and operation.
5. Finish joints of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials as specified for pipe lining after field welding is done.
6. After final field welding of fabricated steel piping fittings and specials, complete the lining and exterior painting at and near the welded connections. a. Repair or replace lining damaged as a result of welding heat, handling, or other causes.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Fabricated steel manifolds shall be field tested with the pipe to which they connect.
B. Holiday Detection Testing of Plastic Tape Wrap Coatings:
1. Perform a complete high voltage electrical inspection (holiday detection testing) of all steel piping systems and fittings coated with plastic tape wrap prior to burying.
a. Perform high voltage electrical inspection in strict accordance with NACE RP0274-74.
b. Test voltage used for the electrical inspection of the piping and fittings shall be in accordance with the recommendations given by the tape coating manufacturer in their published literature.
c. Repair all holidays and defects found in the coating system through the high voltage electrical inspection in strict accordance with the tape coating manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Retest repaired areas in the coating prior to burial of the piping to ensure ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15252-13 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
that all holidays and defects in the coating have been properly repaired.
2. Before conducting holiday detection testing on any piping systems, submit to the ENGINEER for review and approval technical literature and data describing the testing instrumentation, equipment, electrodes, and other accessories that will be used.
a. The literature and data shall include complete information covering the operation and use of the testing equipment, including operational voltage ranges.
3. All holiday detection testing and coating repair work shall be witnessed, inspected and approved by the ENGINEER.
C. Holiday Detection Testing of Extruded Coatings:
1. Perform a complete high voltage electrical inspection (holiday detection testing) of all steel piping systems and fittings coated with extruded high density polyethylene prior to burial of the pipe.
2. Perform the high voltage electrical testing as specified under the preceding paragraph “Holiday Detection Testing of Plastic Tape Wrap Coatings .”
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15255-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15255
STAINLESS STEEL PIPING AND TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Stainless steel piping and tubing, and alloy steel pipe.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B16.9 factory made wrought steel butt welding fittings.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Piping:
1. General:
a. Stainless steel piping 12 inches and smaller in nominal pipe size, for low pressure applications, minimum wall thickness corresponding to Schedule 10S.
2. Pipe sizes specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings are nominal.
3. Supply piping 12 inches and less in diameter in 10 foot and 20 foot lengths without intermediate butt-welds.
4. Make joints with stub ends and backing flanges, welded or flanged.
B. Design:
1. Piping: Suitable for a maximum internal operating pressure of 300 pounds per square inch gauge, and a maximum temperature of 120 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Provide Class 300 flanged ends per ANSI B 16.5.
C. Materials:
1. Pressure Stainless Steel Piping: ASTM A 240, Type 304L stainless steel.
2. Piping Stub Ends: Nonporous cast Type 304L stainless steel: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Alaskan Copper Works, Figure SK38P.
b. .
1) Machine gasket and wetted surfaces of stub ends free of crevices, pits, ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15255-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set cracks and protrusions.
3. Backing Flanges: Cast stainless steel with stainless steel bolt sets.
D. Fabrication:
1. General:
a. Provide stainless steel fabrications free from pits, cracks, crevices, oxidation, weld splatter, stains, and discoloration.
1) Surfaces: Clean and of uniform appearance.
2. Pipe:
a. Pipe 12 Inches and larger in Diameter: Automatically welded using gas tungsten-arc procedures.
b. Piping 4 Inches Through 12 Inches in Diameter: Double butt-welded. c. Piping less than 4 Inches in Diameter: Single butt-welded.
3. Fittings:
a. Welded with Type 304L filler metal.
b. Fitting Dimensions: In accordance with ANSI B 16.9.
c. Elbows 24 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Die formed and automatically welded, using gas tungsten-arc procedures with inert gas backing. d. Tees, Crosses, True Y's and Laterals: Nozzle welded, using manual shielded metal arc procedures and double welds.
e. Reducers: Cone type.
f. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, terminate spools with stub ends, and determine face to face dimensions by pipe fabricator.
4. Welding:
a. Welding: As specified in Section 05120.
b. Ensure that weld seams have full penetration and be free of oxidation, crevices, pits, cracks, and protrusions.
1) Weld seams without undercuts.
2) Provide weld crowns of 1/16 inch with tolerance of plus 1/16 inch and minus 1/32 inch.
c. Accomplish longitudinal welds on fittings, except elbows by the same procedures as for pipe.
d. Manually Weld Pipe Spools with Type 304L Filler Metal:
1) Where internal weld seams are not accessible, use gas tungsten-arc procedures with internal gas purge.
2) Where internal weld seams are accessible, weld seams inside and outside using manual shielded metal-arc procedures.
5. Following fabrication, pickle and passivate pipe, spools, fittings, and other shop fabricated pieces by immersion in sulfuric acid solution followed by immersion in a nitric-hydrofluoric bath and subsequent wash at the proper temperature and length of time to remove free iron, weld scale, and other impurities, and to obtain a passive finished surface.
2.02 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING
A. General:
1. Provide stainless steel tubing in sizes indicated on the Drawings. a. Where not indicated on the Drawings, provide stainless steel tubing of the size required to perform the function intended.
b. Minimum Size of Stainless Steel Tubing: 1/4 inch outside diameter.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15255-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set B. Tubing:
1. Stainless Steel Tubing: Seamless tubing made of Type 316 stainless steel and conforming to ASTM A 269.
a. Wall thickness adequate for test pressure specified, but not less than
0.035 inch.
C. Fittings:
1. Fittings for Use with Stainless Steel Tubing: Swage ferrule design, with components made of Type 316 stainless steel.
a. Fittings: Double acting ferrule design, providing both a primary seal and a secondary bearing force.
b. Flare, bite, or compression type fittings are not acceptable.
2. Fittings: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crawford Fitting Company, Swagelok.
b. Hoke, Gyrolok.
c. Parker, CPI.
D. Valves:
1. Valves for Use with Stainless Steel Tubing: Air cocks of Type 316 stainless steel.
2.03 ALLOY STEEL PIPE
A. Alloy Steel Pipe and Fittings for Use on Condensate Return Piping: Manufacturers:
One of the following or equal:
1. U.S. Steel, Cor-Ten.
2. Youngstown Sheet and Tube, Yoloy.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test piping by air method only. Use test pressure of 15 pounds per square inch gauge.
B. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions, and oxidation deposits.
C. Examine 3 percent of the welds by X-ray methods.
1. For each weld found to be defective by X-ray methods, examine 3 additional welds using the same method.
2. Provide interpretation of X-ray pictures by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to ENGINEER, and submit written report of the findings issued by the laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide stainless steel piping with flanges at valves, tees, drip legs, and digester gas control and safety equipment locations.
B. Provide stainless steel tubing for control and instrument air piping and for other applications indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15255-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test piping by air method only. Use test pressure of 15 pounds per square inch gauge.
B. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions, and oxidation deposits.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Preserve appearance and finish of stainless steel piping by providing suitable protection during handling and installation and until final acceptance of the Work.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15956-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 15956
PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Test requirements for piping systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
2. Section 15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC).
B. National Fuel Gas Code: ANSI Z 223.1 or NFPA 54.
C. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME):
1. B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
2. B31.1 - Power Piping.
3. B31.3 - Process Piping.
D. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC).
1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052; are specified in the specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified herein.
2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower leakage allowances.
3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the Uniform Plumbing Code, and UL requirements.
4. Test Natural Gas or Digester Gas Piping:
a. For less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge working pressure, test in accordance with Uniform Mechanical Code or the National Fuel Gas Code, whichever is more stringent.
b. For 125 pounds per square inch gauge or greater working pressure, test per ANSI/ASME B31.3 or ANSI/ASME B31.8, whichever is more stringent.
5. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the pressure at the highest point of the piping section under test. Lower test pressure as necessary to prevent testing the lowest point above a safe test pressure.
B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads, restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and other means and facilities required to perform tests.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15956-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set C. Water for Testing, Cleaning, and Disinfecting:
1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided as specified in Section 01500.
D. Pipes to Be Tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead.
E. Unsuccessful Tests:
1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the specified requirements.
2. Repeat testing until tests are successful.
F. Test Completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing.
G. Test Water Disposal: Dispose of testing water at location designated by OWNER in accordance with requirements of federal, state, county, and city regulations governing disposal of wastes in the location of the Project and disposal site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule and Notification of Tests:
1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding the date of the scheduled tests.
2. Notification of Readiness to Test: Immediately before testing, notify ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping. Have personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting notification of readiness.
1.05 SEQUENCE
A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests.
B. Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before backfilling and compacting.
C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not indicated or specified otherwise.
D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance.
E. Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with slab, structure, or permanent improvement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15956-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION
A. Alignment and Grade:
1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light, or laser beam.
2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no other defects are observed.
B. Deflection Test:
1. Pull a mandrel through the clean piping section under test.
2. Perform the test not sooner than 30 days after installation and not later than 60 days after installation.
3. Use a 9 rod mandrel with a contact length of not less than the nominal diameter of the pipe within one percent plus or minus.
4. Consider test complete when the mandrel can be pulled through the piping with reasonable effort by 1 person, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
3.02 AIR TESTING METHOD FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Air test piping, indicated with "AM" in the Piping Schedule, with air or another nonflammable or inert gas.
B. Test gas, air, liquefied petroleum gas, liquid chlorine, and chlorine gas piping by the air test method.
1. Test chlorine piping with dry air or nitrogen having a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less. Supply temporary air driers as necessary.
C. Test at pressure as specified in Piping Schedule in Section 15052.
1. Provide temporary pressure relief valve for piping under test. Set at the lesser of 110 percent of the test pressure or 50 pounds per square inch gauge over the test pressure.
2. Air method test pressures shall not exceed 110 percent of the piping maximum allowable working pressure calculated in accordance with the most stringent of ANSI/ASME B31.1, ANSI/ASME B31.3, ANSI/ASE B31.8, or the pipe manufacturer's stated maximum working pressure.
3. Gradually increase test pressure to an initial test pressure equal to the lesser of one-half the test pressure or 25 pounds per square inch gauge.
4. Perform initial check of joints and fittings for leakage.
5. Gradually increase test pressure in steps no larger than the initial pressure. Check for leakage at each step increase until test pressure reached.
6. At each step in the pressure, examine and test piping being air tested for leaks with soap solution.
7. Consider examination complete when piping section under test holds the test pressure for 15 minutes without losses.
3.03 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING
A. Test Gravity Flow Piping Indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as Follows:
1. Unless Specified Otherwise, Subject Gravity Flow Piping to the Following Tests:
a. Alignment and grade.
b. For plastic piping test for deflection.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15956-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for storm drains and culverts.
2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling.
3. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at least 24 hours.
a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no visible leaks are observed.
b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of 24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance. c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for minimum of four hours while accurately measuring the volume of water added to maintain the test pressure.
1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the following maximum leakage allowances:
a) For Concrete Piping with Rubber Gasket Joints: 80 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test.
(i). Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage
allowance.
b) For Vitrified Clay and Other Piping: 500 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test.
3.04 TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is 20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test method, indicated "HH" in the Piping schedule.
B. General:
1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the piping.
2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide blinds or other means to isolate test sections.
3. Do not include valves, equipment or piping specialties in test sections if test pressure exceeds the valve, equipment or piping specialty safe test pressure allowed by the item's manufacturer.
4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure.
5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the same piping material and test pressure.
6. When Test Results Indicate Failure of Selected Sections, Limit Tests to Piping:
a. Between valves.
b. Between a valve and the end of the piping.
c. Less than 500 feet long.
7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
C. Testing Procedures:
1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15956-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.
3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks.
Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are observed.
D. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance:
1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe Thread threaded and welded joints.
2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.
3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged threaded or welded joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period. a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance shall have been achieved when the observed leakage during the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following formula:
L = S x D x P1/2 x 133,200-1
wherein the terms shall mean:
L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S = Length of the test section in feet.
D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches.
P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches, gauge, at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the pressure gauge.
x = The multiplication symbol.
3.05 TESTING LOW-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure is less than 20 pounds per square inch gauge, by the low head pressure test method, indicated "LH" in the Piping Schedule.
B. General:
1. Test pressures shall be as scheduled in Section 15052.
2. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 2 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure.
3. Test connections, blowoffs, vents, closure pieces, and joints into structures, including existing bell rings and other appurtenances, with the piping.
4. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
C. Visible Leaks Test:
1. Subject piping under test to the specified pressure measured at the lowest end.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 15956-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2. Fill piping section under test slowly with potable water while venting air.
3. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for the water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.
4. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks.
Consider testing complete when no visible leaks are observed.
D. Pressure Test with Maximum Leakage Allowance:
1. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.
2. Accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period. a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage of 80 gallons per inch of nominal diameter, per mile of piping section under test after 24 hours and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
b. Successful completion of the leakage test shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
E. Optional Joint Test:
1. When Joint Testing Is Allowed by Note in the Piping Schedule, the Procedure Shall Be as Follows:
a. Joint testing will be allowed only for low head pressure piping.
2. Joint testing may be performed with water or air.
3. Joint test piping after completion of backfill and compaction to the top of the trench.
4. Joint Testing with Water:
a. Measure test pressure at the invert of the pipe. Apply pressure of 4 feet plus the inside diameter of the pipe in water column within 0.20 feet in water column.
b. Maintain test pressure for one minute.
c. Base the allowable leakage per joint on 80 gallons per inch nominal diameter, per mile of piping, per 24 hours equally distributed to the actual number of joints per mile for the type of piping.
d. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage.
e. Successful completion of the joint test with water shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage.
5. Joint Testing with Air:
a. Apply test pressure of 3 pounds per square inch gauge with a maximum variation of plus 0.20 and minus 0.00 pounds per square inch. b. Maintain test pressure for 2 minutes.
c. Consider the pressure test to be complete when the test pressure does not drop below 2.7 pounds per square inch for the duration of the test.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16010-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Electrical distribution system and utilization equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such, all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its subcontractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install a tested and working electrical system, substantially as indicated on the Drawings and as hereinafter specified. System includes all items not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or indicated on the Drawings or accepted Shop Drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, and shall be deemed to be included herein.
B. Notify Engineer of discrepancies within the Contract Documents and discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual field conditions.
C. The Specifications and Drawings indicate or specify minimum sizes of equipment, electric devices, and other components of electrical system, but the Specifications and Drawings do not indicate every offset and fitting, or every structural or mechanical difficulty that may be encountered during the execution of the Work.
D. Install equipment at locations indicated on the Drawings as closely as field conditions permit. Obtain accepted equipment submittal dimensions prior to installing pads, conduits, and cable trays.
E. Make minor variations to alignment of equipment and/or installation of raceway systems to avoid conflict with other portions of the Work.
F. Single Line Diagrams Indicate Circuit Voltages. Single line diagrams also indicate circuit protection rating, and other pertinent data. Use single line diagrams to resolve conflicts. When not indicated on the Drawings, provide grounding in accordance with NEC Article 250 and as specified in Section 16062.
G. Temporary Power:
1. Provide and maintain temporary power, lighting, and telephone systems as needed for construction as specified in Section 01500. Include weatherproof panel(s) for main breakers and electrical power distribution system.
2. Install temporary wiring in accordance with NEC Article 305 with Type SO portable cable, watertight connections, and ground fault interrupting equipment. After construction is completed, remove temporary systems.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16010-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Include data on and details of control devices, fixtures, wire, cables, raceways, and other electrical equipment or material, specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Cutting and Patching Requests: Submit as specified in Section 01732.
C. Furnish submittals that are fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every component.
D. Project Record Documents: Submit in accordance with Section 01770. Include drawings of wiring terminations at electrical equipment including, but not limited to, terminal/junction boxes, revised Shop Drawings reflecting modifications made during progress of the Work including testing, and revised Specifications and Drawings with conductors identified identically as on the Specifications and Drawings and accepted Shop Drawings. Updated Shop Drawings shall include all drafting work.
E. Provide Complete as-built interconnection and loop drawings for all wiring installed on the project in both AutoCAD and PDF electronic formats.
F. Seismic and anchoring calculations for all electrical supports utilized on the project weather pre-manufactured or per the typical details included on the contract drawings in conformance with Section 01612.
G. Acceptance Testing Information and Documents: Submit as specified in Section 16950.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Perform electrical work, including connection to electrical equipment integral with mechanical equipment, in accordance with latest published requirements of the following codes and code/standard making organizations:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
5. National Electrical Code (NEC).
6. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).
7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
10. State and local codes.
11. Uniform Building Code (UBC).
B. When applicable, materials and equipment used in performance of electrical work shall be listed or labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories or other equivalent, recognized, and independent testing laboratory, for the class of service intended.
C. Qualifications of Low Voltage Equipment Manufacturer:
1. Manufacturer of proposed product with components uniquely selected by engineering review.
2. Proprietary bussing and enclosure designs listed by UL in manufacturer's own file for minimum 15 years with satisfactory performance record.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16010-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. Capable of providing warranty for assembly when built-up with components from various manufacturers.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship electrical panels, switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, and other electrical distribution equipment in sealed dust and moisture-proof plastic sheet enclosures. Equipment containing dirt, dust, water, grease, rust, or damaged parts or components may be rejected.
B. Provide for delivery, unloading, transportation, and storage of equipment until installation. Protect electrical and instrumentation equipment and panels from physical and environmental damage. Store and maintain equipment in a weatherproof building until installed.
C. Store electrical equipment, including switchgear, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, instrumentation control panels, and other enclosures that house electronic equipment rated for a specified ambient or environmental temperature range, in air conditioned buildings to protect equipment from temperatures above 90 degrees Fahrenheit and heated buildings to protect equipment from temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Assume liability for the storage facilities or equipment stored therein.
D. Maintain storage facilities in neat condition with utilities. Maintain stored equipment in same condition as when received.
E. Provide continuous access for inspection of stored equipment.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and Schedule as specified in Sections 01352, 01140, and progress schedule submitted as specified in Section 01324.
B. Coordinate work with Engineer to minimize downtime of existing operating equipment and electrical distribution system and to preclude unsafe operations. Notify Owner 10 days prior to power interruptions. Coordinate downtime with Owner.
C. Before work is performed on low voltage or medium voltage circuits, or in manholes containing low voltage or medium voltage circuits, identify and de-energize the circuits.
1.07 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. The following operating conditions are applicable for all equipment of this Specification.
1. Humidity: 0-95 percent. Space heaters shall be provided to prevent condensation.
2. Ambient Temperature: Minus 20 degrees Celsius to plus 50 degrees Celsius.
3. Altitude: Sea level to 200 feet.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16010-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Cutting and Repairing: Cut and patch the Work as specified in Section 01732. Where it becomes necessary to cut into existing work for the purpose of making electrical installations, use core drills for making circular holes. Other demolition methods for cutting or removing shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to starting the work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Corrosion Protection:
1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, that may come in contact, with neoprene washers, 9 mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets.
2. Restore factory finishes which are damaged or rusted to their original new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install electrical work prior to placing floors and walls. Provide all sleeves and openings through floors and walls required for passage of all conduits and other raceways.
Sleeves shall be rigidly supported and suitably packed or sealed to prevent ingress of wet concrete or water.
C. Provide all insets and hangers required to support raceways and other electrical equipment. If the inserts, hangers, sleeves, or openings, are improperly placed or installed, do all necessary work to rectify the errors.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean each piece of electrical equipment, existing and new, both inside and outside, and retouch equipment to match existing paint.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect products and provide heat to eliminate condensation until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16050-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic electrical materials and methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
1. A 525 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), by Hot-Dip Process.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Support Design Responsibility:
1. The Contractor providing the electrical support system shall be considered the designer of the support system. Typical details included on the contract documents are for general minimum standard for style, size, and materials and shall be used as a guide for the Contractor in designing the specific electrical supports utilized on the project.
2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system.
4. Seismic Design Criteria: As specified in Section 01612 as specified for all electrical supports utilized for the project, including any typical electrical support details included on the contract documents that are actually utilized.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Structural calculations for electrical equipment anchorage.
B. Shop drawings and product data.
C. Furnish Submittals in accordance with Sections 01330 and 16010.
D. Seismic and anchoring calculations for all supports utilized on the project whether premanufactured or per the typical details included on the contract drawings.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Minimum warranty for all equipment to be free of defects in material and workmanship for 1 year from the date of provisional acceptance for on-going municipal operational use of the equipment by the Owner. Warranty shall cover parts and labor.
Provide longer warranties when specified in the individual equipment sections.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16050-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Where warranty exceeds 1 year, manufacturer’s warranty shall be issued in the Owner’s name beginning on the date of provisional acceptance for on-going municipal operational use of the equipment by the Owner.
C. Provisional acceptance for on-going municipal operational use shall require substantial completion for those elements to be utilized to maintain municipal operations during construction; pass all acceptance testing and all related punch list items shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner; and the Owner shall agree in writing to provisionally accept those elements before operational transitioning occurs.
Provisional acceptance is limited to those elements described in the written acceptance from the Owner.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish and install a minimum of 25 percent spare terminal blocks in each terminal/junction box, controls cabinet, PLC cabinet, and Motor Control Centers.
B. Allow a minimum of 15 percent extra wiring of each size.
C. Allow a minimum of 15 percent extra conduit of each size.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unless specified otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the fabricator of major electrical equipment, such as lighting and distribution panelboards, switchgear, variable frequency drives, and motor control centers, shall also be the manufacturer of the major devices herein.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Materials, equipment, and parts comprising any unit or part thereof specified or indicated on the Drawings shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, and of highest grade consistent with the industrial industry standards. Damaged materials, equipment, and parts are not considered to be new and unused and will not be accepted.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Support Channels: 316 stainless steel.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut.
b. Superstrut.
c. Globe Strut.
B. Support Channel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 316 Stainless steel.
C. Non-fused Terminal Blocks: Sized as required for conductors.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Square D Company.
b. Buchanan.
D. Fused Terminal Blocks: Circuit isolation, fused switch type, sized as required for conductors. Fuse size shall be based upon actual load and conductors to be protected.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16050-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
a. Square D Company.
b. Buchanan.
E. Control Relays:
1. Industrial 600 volt, 10 ampere type with contact arrangement and operating coils of proper voltage as required by control circuit sequence; with minimum of 4 reversible-pole contacts; coils sealed by pressure molding.
2. Non-industrial or plug-in type control relays shall be prohibited unless accepted in writing.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Square D Co.
b. Cutler-Hammer.
F. Intrinsically Safe Relays:
1. Factory Mutual approved to allow the use of every type of remote pilot device located in Class 1, Division 1 or 2, hazardous areas by providing a pilot circuit incapable of releasing sufficient electrical energy to ignite gases and vapors classified in Groups A, B, C, and D.
2. Output relay with double pole, double throw continuous rating of 10 amperes at 120 volts alternating current], capable of operating on the voltage indicated.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. B/W - Controls Series 53.
b. Cutler-Hammer - Powered Relay.
G. Nameplates:
1. Type: Black lamicoid with white letters.
2. Fastener: Round head stainless steel screws.
H. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Warning Signs:
1. Type: Suitable for exterior use and meeting OSHA regulations.
I. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels: Vinyl plastic.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Brady.
b. Seton.
J. Underground Hazard Tape: 6 inches wide.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Panduit.
K. Arc Flash Hazard Labels
1. Material and sizes as specified in Section 16305.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. The Contractor shall also review information indicated on the Drawings for architectural, structural, yard, mechanical, and other specialties, and the accepted electrical and mechanical shop drawings, and shall adjust his work to conform to all conditions indicated thereon.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16050-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Anchor electrical equipment to building floors, electrical equipment foundations, or other supports by bolts and anchor bolts and studs.
B. Anchor each piece of electrical equipment with minimum 1/2 inch diameter Type 316 stainless steel bolts, anchor bolts, or studs. Acceptable connectors shall be furnished in each corner of each section of electrical equipment, minimum.
C. Where plates are embedded in concrete supporting electrical equipment, fasten electrical equipment to the embedded plates with minimum 1/2 inch diameter welded studs. Where required, the number of studs connecting the embedded plates to floors shall be increased as required based upon the calculations of seismic forces in order to resist the forces from the electrical equipment supplied. The additional studs shall be deemed as part of these Contract Documents.
3.03 TORQUING
A. After installing and before energizing electrical equipment, torque each bolted bus and cable connection in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with calibrated torque wrenches. Include each bolt at each connection, both factory and field installed, for motor control centers, variable frequency drives, bus ducts, switchgear, switchboards, and other equipment installed.
3.04 CONDUCTOR FASTENERS
A. Use screw type conductor fasteners and other permanent, such as epoxy conductor adhesives, in junction or pull boxes, termination cabinets, panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, or other enclosures containing electrical devices and/or conductors. Do not use glue-on type conductor fasteners.
3.05 SUPPORT CHANNELS
A. Install channels, as required for support of raceways, cable trays, device enclosures, and other electrical equipment.
B. Separate iron or steel supports from aluminum with 1/4 inch neoprene or other nonmetallic gaskets.
C. Paint field cuts and scratches of galvanized steel channels with a cold galvanizing spray paint.
3.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Furnish and install terminal blocks in control panels, cabinets, terminal/junction boxes, variable frequency drives, motor control centers, switchgear and similar equipment and identify the terminal blocks by numbering and labeling in accordance with accepted shop drawings. The terminal blocks shall be circuit isolation fused-switch type where indicated on the Drawings and as required.
3.07 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates where indicated on the Drawings or specified.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16050-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Each disconnect means for service, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors and pushbutton stations shall have nameplates indicating its purpose or identifying the load and circuit numbers.
3.08 AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT WARNING AND HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNS A. Place a warning ribbon or other effective means suitable for conditions above underground installations in accordance with NEC Article 710-3.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation of equipment.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16062-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16062
GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Grounding electrode systems, consisting of concrete encased bare ground conductors and ground rods. Equipment grounding conductors, ground connections and general requirements for grounding.
B. Related Sections
1. Refer to Section 16010
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 250 - Grounding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Driven Ground Rods:
1. Copper-covered steel.
2. 3/4 inch diameter.
3. 10 feet long, minimum.
B. Ground Conductor: Bare copper.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Conductors shall be same type and insulation as the load circuit conductors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Bond electrical enclosures, including metallic raceways, panels, switchboards and other similar metallic panels, cases and devices associated with power, instrumentation, and control systems to the grounding electrode system.
B. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors prior to construction of concrete slabs and duct banks.
1. Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment and electrical enclosures.
2. Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are installed.
C. Provide either exothermic welded or mechanical connections for grounding cable to rods or cable.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16062-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
D. When size is not indicated on the Drawings, size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-66 and Table 250-122.
E. Install a green insulated equipment grounding conductor, or multi-conductor cable with integral green insulated grounding conductor, with each feeder and branch circuit from the power source grounding means to the load equipment or device.
F. Install ground bushings at both ends of rigid conduit runs. Do not use locknuts. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system.
G. When not indicated on the Drawings, install grounding electrode systems in compliance with NEC-250, Part III.
H. Shield Grounding.
1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only unless shop drawings indicate otherwise. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the power source end of the signal carried by the cable.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test ground resistance per NETA Standards, for entire system and at each building/structure where electrical equipment is installed.
B. Invite Engineer to witness ground resistance testing.
C. Where maximum allowable ground resistance of 3 ohms is exceeded, install additional grounding mats or ground rods until ground resistance is equal to or below maximum allowable ground resistance.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16070-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes Requirements for:
1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16050.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Section 16010.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16010.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Support Design Responsibility:
1. The Contractor providing the electrical support system shall be considered the designer of the support system. Typical details included on the contract documents are for general minimum standard for style, size, and materials and shall be used as a guide for the Contractor in designing the specific electrical supports utilized on the project.
2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system and identifying the components of the support system.
4. Seismic Design Criteria: As specified in Section 01612 as specified for all electrical supports utilized for the project, including any typical electrical support details included on the contract documents that are actually utilized.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Conform to the requirements of the Building Code.
2. Demonstrate the Following using Generally Accepted Engineering Methods:
a. That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment requirements. b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in the structural materials to which they are attached.
3. Seismic Withstand Requirements:
a. Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will meet the requirements for the seismic design indicated in Section 01612.
4. Wind Withstand Requirements:
a. All exterior freestanding equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will meet the requirements for wind design indicated in Section 01614. b. Minimum Safety Factor Against Overturning: 1.5.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16070-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
c. The foundation shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and code required forces without deflections and deformations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01330 and 16010.
B. Product Data:
1. Anchoring and leveling criteria and recommendations for equipment manufacturers:
a. Include these requirements in the installation recommendation submittal required by Section 16010.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Furnish complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc.
2. Furnish complete anchoring details for pole lights, transformers, control panels, supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports all equipment in excess of 200- pounds and all freestanding supports:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is being constructed.
b. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a registered engineer; will be reviewed for general consistency with the requirements shown in the contract Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation.
3. Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will satisfy the design loading criteria.
D. Installation Instructions:
1. The written instructions must detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, setting into place and anchoring.
2. Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the equipment based on the seismic conditions of the site as specified in Section 01612:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is being constructed.
E. Calculations:
1. All calculations shall be performed, signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer, Registered in the State where the project is being constructed and shall show that all specifications requirements are met. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the requirements shown in the Contract Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16010.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 16010.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16070-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Section 16010
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 16010
1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Refer to Section 16010.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Kindorf.
2. Super Strut.
3. Power-Strut.
4. Unistrut.
5. B-Line.
6. Rob Roy.
7. Aickinstrut.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. All areas:
1. Supports and hardware fabricated from stainless steel.
2. All hardware, clamps, etc. shall be stainless steel.
B. Indoors, Outdoors, and Corrosive Areas, NEMA 4X:
1. Supports and hardware fabricated from stainless steel, or fiberglass.
2. All hardware, clamps, etc. shall be either stainless steel, or fiberglass and shall be of the same material as that of the strut.
C. Use fiberglass preformed channel when attaching conduits to basin walls when in direct contact with earth:
1. Pipe Hangers and clamps shall be fiberglass and designed for the preformed channel.
2. All hardware including threaded rod, couplers, nuts, bolts, etc. shall be stainless steel or fiberglass.
D. Outdoor installation materials must be suitable for use in direct sunlight.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors:
1. Refer to Section 05120.
2.04 FIELD FABRICATION
A. Re-coat all drilled holes and cut surfaces on FRP materials.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16070-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2.05 FINISHES
A. Paint and finish all supporting structures in conformance with the Painting and Finishing Sections of the Contract Documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16010
B. General:
1. Equipment Anchoring:
a. Install equipment in accordance with the printed recommendations of the equipment manufacturer’s literature, including anchoring methods and leveling criteria.
b. Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that provide structural support based on the seismic loads and wind loads as indicated in Sections 01612 and 01614:
1) Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height divided by 210 unless approved by the Engineer.
c. Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that weigh more than 500 pounds:
1) Fabricate pedestals out of welded angle, tube sections, or preformed channel.
2) If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, the pedestal shall match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions. d. Provide transformers hung from stud walls and weighing more than 300 pounds with auxiliary floor supports.
2. Furnish all conduit racks and trapeze structures needed to support the conduits from the building walls or ceiling. Group conduits and position on racks to minimize crossovers, etc.:
a. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from swaying.
3. Mount all pull boxes, switches, panelboards, control panels, instruments, etc. in any damp or wet location on minimum of 7/8 inch stainless steel or fiberglass preformed mounting channel. Mount channel vertically along the vertical length of the device so that any water or moisture may run freely behind the device.
4. Concrete housekeeping pads are required for all floor-standing electrical equipment and conduit penetrations through floor:
a. Pads shall be a minimum of 3.5 inches above the surrounding floor or grade unless otherwise noted.
b. Pads shall extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond the extent of the equipment in all directions.
c. Pads shall be sized for the actual equipment furnished and all future equipment identified on the Contract Drawings.
d. All edges of the housekeeping pad shall be chamfered.
C. Raceway:
1. Install all raceway cabinets, boxes, fixtures, and other appurtenances parallel or perpendicular to building lines and level and plumb.
2. Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, devices, etc. on Contractor-fabricated racks unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16070-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. All raceways shall be supported directly from building structure. Do not suspend raceways or equipment from piping or duct work.
D. Anchor Methods:
1. Solid Concrete: Metal or plastic wedge type expansion bolts (or preset concrete inserts).
2. Metal surfaces: Machine screws or bolts.
3. Hollow masonry units: Toggle bolts or expansion anchors.
E. Support Luminaries from Structural Elements Capable of Carrying the Total Weight:
1. Provide ceiling or pendent mounted high intensity discharge luminaries with a separate safety chain connecting the lens, reflector, ballast etc. to the building structure.
F. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or piercing a structural concrete member.
G. Plumbers perforated strap or tape is not acceptable.
H. When supporting devices on metal or wood stud construction bridge studs with mounting channel and mount the devices to the mounting channel.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 16010.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Section 16010.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16075-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Identification of electrical and instrumentation equipment, conductors, and cables.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 110 - 22 - Disconnecting Means.
2. Article 210 - 4 - Multiwire Branch Circuits.
3. Article 200 - Use and Identification of Grounded Conductors.
4. Article 384 - Switchboards and Panelboards.
5. Article 300 - Wiring Methods.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 16050.
B. Product Data: Include tagging system, labels, markers, and hazard tape.
C. Project Record Documents:
1. Document wire, cable, and conductor tags, and bundle tags installed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. Document installed wire, cable, and conductor tags and bundle tags when not specifically indicated.
3. Indicate on Record Drawings deviations from accepted shop drawing conductor identification.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16010.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LABELS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Brady.
2. Seton.
B. Type: Sleeve type.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Brady.
2. Seton.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16075-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Type: Slip-on PVC sleeve or strap-on type.
C. Printed using Brady marker "XC PLUS," or equal.
D. Markers used in tunnels or other wet locations shall be on heat-shrinkable marking sleeves.
E. Use self-laminating vinyl on white background for markers within electrical equipment such as panels, termination cabinets, motor control centers.
2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Almtek: Almtek Type Mini-Tag.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify 3-phase system conductors and cables as Phases A, B, and C and identify 1-phase system conductors and cables at electrical equipment including, but not limited to, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, and motors.
1. Match Owner's existing electrical system identification scheme or meet requirements of the authority responsible for the project.
2. 3-Phase 480 Volts AC System Conductors: Phase A, Brown; Phase B, Orange; Phase C, Yellow.
3. 3-Phase Conductors for 120/208 VAC Circuits: Phase A, Red; Phase B, black, Phase C, Blue.
4. Neutral Conductor: White for 120 VAC and gray for 277 VAC.
5. Insulated Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green.
6. General Purpose AC Control Conductors: Red.
7. General Purpose DC Control Conductors: Violet
B. Use control cable or instrumentation cable for alarm annunciator field wiring as indicated on the Drawings and specified. Use color coding and phasing consistent throughout the site. Bus bars at panelboards and motor control centers to be connected Phase A-B-C, top to bottom, or left to right facing connecting lugs.
C. Conductors Number 2 American Wire Gauge (AWG) and smaller to be factory color coded with a separate color for each phase and neutral, which shall be used consistently throughout the system. Larger cables to be coded by the use of colored tape.
D. In addition to color coding, for all 1-phase and 3-phase systems, identify each cable (single or multi-conductor) and conductor at each end, in each manhole, pullbox, cable tray, or other component of the raceway system. This identification is applicable to all power, control, alarm, signal, network, and instrumentation cables, and conductors.
E. Identify each cable (single or multi-conductor) and groups or bundles of individual single conductors in each manhole, pullbox, cable tray or other component of the raceway system with circuit identification markers. Implement a "from-to" cable/conductor bundle tagging system as part of this identification effort.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16075-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
F. Identify each individual conductor at each termination. This includes such locations as switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, control panels, junction/terminal boxes, all field devices, and all other locations where conductors are terminated. Identify the termination of these conductors in accordance with the accepted shop drawings. Tag conductors with sleeve type labels.
G. Where more than 1 nominal voltage system exists, identify each ungrounded system conductor by phase and system. Permanently post means of identification at each branch-circuit panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, motor control center, or other type of power distribution equipment.
H. Include the following minimum information for wire and cable identification.
1. Circuit number or load identification tag number.
2. Origin (from source).
3. Destination (to load).
I. Identify each individual conduit at each end of the conduit run, including all spare conduits. This includes at such locations as switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, variable speed drives, manholes, and pull boxes. Review with Engineer for a labeling system.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16123-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16123
600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable.
2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable.
3. Fire Alarm wire and cable.
4. Communication wire and cable.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16010.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. B8 - Specification for Concentric-LayBStranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
C. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 250 - Grounding.
2. Article 310 - Conductors for General Wiring.
3. Article 760 - Fire Alarm Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittal in accordance with Section 01330 and 16010.
B. Shop Drawings: Show splice locations.
C. Product Data: Include wires, cables, pulling compounds, and splicing materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16010.
B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum 12 month warranty form date of final acceptance by the Owner.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16123-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRE AND CABLE MATERIALS
A. Conductors: ASTM B8, soft drawn copper, maximum 12 months old, minimum 97 percent conductivity; American Wire Gauge (AWG) sizes as indicated on the Drawings, Class B or C stranded.
B. Insulation Thickness: Minimum specified by Article 310 of the National Electrical Code.
2.02 600-VOLT CLASS CABLE
A. Power Wire and Cable:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Okonite Company.
b. BICC Cable.
c. Southwire Company.
d. General Cable Corporation.
B. Control Wire and Cable:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Okonite Company.
b. BICC Cable.
c. Southwire Company.
d. General Cable Corporation.
C. Insulation for Individual Wires or Multiple Conductor Cable for Power and Control Circuits: Type THWN insulation as defined by NEC Table 310-13.
D. Jackets for Multiple Conductor Cable for Power and Control Circuits: Type PVC.
E. Multi-Conductor Cable Insulated Grounding Conductors:
1. Color: Integral green.
2. Size: In accordance with 250-122 of the National Electrical Code.
F. Solid-conductor wire, Number 10 AWG and smaller, may be used for lighting and receptacle circuits.
2.03 INSTRUMENTATION CLASS CABLE
A. Single Pair or Triad Applications:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. The Okonite Company, Okoseal-N Type P-OS.
b. Equivalent manufactured by Cooper Industries, Belden Wire and Cable Division.
B. Multiple Pair or Triad Applications:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. The Okonite Company, Okoseal-N Type SP-OS.
b. Equivalent manufactured by Cooper Industries, Belden Wire and Cable Division.
C. Approved for cable tray installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16123-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
D. Number of Individually Shielded, Twisted Pairs and Triads: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
F. Cable Type: TC.
G. Temperature Rating: 90 degrees Celsius dry location, 75 degrees Celsius wet location.
H. Conductors: Bare, soft annealed copper in accordance with ASTM B3, Class B, 7- strand concentric in accordance with ASTM B8.
I. Conductor Insulation: Flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4 mils nominal thickness, 90 degrees Celsius temperature rating in accordance with Underwriter's Laboratory Subject 1277.
J. Color Code: Provide conductor color code as specified in Section 16075.
K. Single Pair or Triad Shielding:
1. Group Shielding: Minimum 1.35 mil double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymerbacked tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
2. Drain Wire: 7-strand tinned copper drain wire, 2 sizes smaller than conductor.
L. Multiple Pair or Triad Shielding:
1. Group Shield: 1.35 mil aluminum-polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage and a 7-strand tinned copper drain wire, 2 sizes smaller than conductor.
Completely isolate group shields from each other.
2. Cable Shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage and a 7-strand tinned copper drain wire, same size as conductors.
M. Jacket: Black, flame-retardant per Underwriter's Laboratory Subject 1277, 90 degrees Celsius temperature rating, rip cord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal.
N. Conductor Size: Number 16 AWG minimum unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
O. Numerically identify every conductor within each pair and triad.
2.04 NETWORK CABLE
A. Provide Cat-6a STP Shielded Twisted Pair, 4 pair network cable.
2.05 ALL WEATHER INSTRUMENT CABLE
A. Instrument cable between manufacturer sensors and instrument analyzers run without conduit.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. The Draka Marine Oil Gas international: BOSTRIG Type P signal cable 600V.
C. Characteristics:
1. 4 pair 18 gauge wires.
2. Suitable in Class 1 Division 1 locations.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16123-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. Soft annealed stranded tin copper conductors.
4. Insulation: Bostrig Type P chemically cross-linked polyolefin (XPLO) meeting IEEE 1560 (2001).
5. Shield: Aluminum/polyester tape with drain wire, 100% coverage, applied over each twisted pair and the cable core.
6. Jacket: Flame retardant Arctic Neoprene, complying with Type N Neoprene as required per IEEE-1580 (2001).
7. Armor: Braided bonze in accordance with IEEE 1580 (2001).
8. Sheath: Flame Retardant Arctic Neoprene applied over the armor.
9. Super resistant to oil, abrasion, moisture, mud, crush, and impact.
10. Meets IEEE standards for 600 V/IEC standards for 0.6/1kW.
11. UL listed.
2.06 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Splicing Material: In conformance with ANSI C119.1, IEEE 383, and ICEA 5-19-81;
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Elastimold.
b. Thomas-Betts.
c. Raychem, FCSM Series.
B. Wire Nuts: Rated 600 volt with live-spring feature for tight fitting connections.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. 3M.
b. Thomas and Betts.
C. Junction Boxes and Terminal Cabinets: As specified in Section 16134.
D. Pulling Compound: As recommended by conductor manufacturer.
2.07 WIRE AND CABLE FABRICATION
A. Permanently mark American Wire Gauge (AWG) size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name on outer covering at maximum 24 inch intervals.
B. Identify and mark conductors in accordance with NEC Article 310.
C. Color code wire and cable as specified in Section 16075.
1. Integrally color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller.
2. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG.
D. Fabricate cable ends with provisions for field testing.
2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test full lengths in accordance with ASTM and ICEA Standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous circuit conductors from source to load without splices or terminations in intermediate manholes or pull boxes, except for Number 10 AWG and smaller conductors for lighting and receptacles.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16123-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. Splices:
1. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths that exceed standard manufactured lengths, install and label junction boxes for power conductors or termination cabinets for control and instrument conductors.
2. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in common junction boxes. Install NEMA 4X junction and terminal boxes in wet and outdoor locations. Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word "SPLICE." Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.
C. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits and prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation.
3.02 600-VOLT CLASS CABLE
A. Size power conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code when sizes are not indicated on the Drawings.
B. Install minimum Number 12 AWG wiring for wire external to panels and motor control centers unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, and minimum Number 14 AWG for internal panel control wiring with Type MTW or SIS insulation, unless otherwise specified.
C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's pulling tension and side-wall pressures.
D. Terminations and Splices (600 Volt or Less):
1. Terminations: Terminate control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes in accordance with Section 16134.
2. Splicing: Join conductors mechanically with splice connectors and install heatshrink type insulation. Splice conductors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make waterproof heat shrink type splices in wet and below grade locations.
3. Splice or weld grounding conductors of different sizes.
4. Conductor Number 10 AWG and smaller for lighting and receptacle circuits may be spliced in junction boxes with wire nuts.
3.03 INSTRUMENTATION CLASS CABLE
A. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes or pull boxes. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices and instrument enclosures or panels.
B. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes indicated on the Drawings.
C. Ground cable shields at only one location, typically at panels, not at field instruments.
3.04 SIGNAL CABLE AND CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and power cables by minimum 12 inches.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16123-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: perform functional testing of all electrical systems, and per NETA standards.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16133
CONDUITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Galvanized rigid steel conduit,
2. Flexible conduit,
3. Polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel conduit, and rigid nonmetallic polyvinyl chloride conduit.
4. Rigid non-metallic (PVC)
5. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16010.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
2. C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
3. C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
B. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 348 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.
2. Table 300-5 - Minimum Cover Requirements (0 to 600 volts, Nominal).
3. Article 500 - Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
4. Table 300-50 - Minimum Cover Requirements (over 600 volts, Nominal).
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
2. TC-2 Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit
3. TC-3 PVC Fittings for use with rigid PVC conduit and fittings
4. TC-13 Electrical non-metallic tubing
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):
1. UL 6 - Rigid Metal Conduit.
2. UL 651 – Schedule 40 and 80 rigid PVC conduit
3. UL 1 – Flexible metal conduit
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittal in accordance with Section 01330 and 16010.
B. Shop Drawings: Installation drawing including individual conduit numbers, routing, conduit sizes, circuit numbers contained in each conduit, and number and size of wires in each conduit.
C. Manufacturer's Quality Control Data: Include how products are inspected at work ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
stations, defining quality process from receipt of raw material through shipping.
D. Record Documents: Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on Conduit Drawings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16010.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC):
1. Domestic raw steel, made smooth, clean, and free of burrs and rough spots to enhance wire pulling; interior and exterior surfaces coated with solid, unbroken layer of zinc; threads hot dip galvanized after cutting; entire surface finish coated with secondary bichromate treatment applied over galvanizing able to extend surface protection and prevent oxidation; threads protected by color coded end caps to provide quick trade size identification.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company, Galvite.
b. Triangle PWC, Inc.
c. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation.
d. Western Tube and Conduit.
B. Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit: Grounding type, weatherproof, watertight, maximum 60 inch lengths.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. AFC Cable Systems.
b. Electriflex.
c. Anaconda.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride-coated Rigid Steel Conduit:
1. Galvanized rigid steel conduit with coating conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6; bendable without damage to coatings.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. OCAL, Inc.
c. Triangle Conduit and Cable.
D. Rigid Nonmetallic Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit:
1. High density, Schedule 40, 90 degrees Celsius, heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride, made from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound; maximum 6 grams per 100 grams smoke emission.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Carlon.
b. Triangle Conduit and Cable.
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
2. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company, Electrunite.
3. Triangle PWC, Inc., equivalent product.
4. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation, equivalent product.] ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
2.02 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Couplings, Connectors, and Fittings:
1. Threaded.
2. Manufactured with same materials and process as corresponding conduit.
B. Condulet Fittings:
1. With wedge nut covers, weathertight when located outdoors or in wet or corrosive locations [indicated on the Drawings], matching type for corresponding conduit systems.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton.
C. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings for Exposed Locations:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. OZ/Gedney, Type AX with jumper.
b. Appleton, Type XJ with Jumper.
D. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings at Structural Expansion Joints:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Spring City, Type D.
b. Crouse-Hinds, Type D.
E. Conduit Seals:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
F. Electrical Metallic Tubing Indentor Fittings: Prohibited.
G. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression, non-indentor type.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse- Hinds.
H. Polyvinyl Chloride-coated Rigid Steel Conduit Couplings: One provided loose with each length of conduit.
I. Fasteners for Polyvinyl Chloride-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Polyvinyl chloride-coated steel fasteners with Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and hardware.
J. Fasteners for Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: 316 stainless steel fasteners with Type 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and hardware.
K. Conduit Mounting Strut:
1. Type 316 stainless steel.
L. Conduit Thruwall Seals:
1. 316 Stainless Steel.
2. Polyvinyl chloride oversize sleeve.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-4 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
a. O-Z/Gedney.
2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT FABRICATION A. Coat rigid steel conduit, conduit fittings, and hangers with polyvinyl chloride.
B. Conduit:
1. Ensure that surfaces, including galvanizing, remain intact and undisturbed on both inside and outside of conduit throughout preparation and application processing.
2. Bond polyvinyl chloride coating to outer surfaces of conduit except threads.
3. Provide bond between polyvinyl chloride coating and conduit surface that is greater than tensile strength of plastic.
4. Provide minimum 40 mil thick coating on conduit.
5. Coat interior of conduit and condulet fittings with nominal 2 mil thick corrosionresistant urethane finish.
6. Coat threads with clear urethane finish.
C. Couplings:
1. Bond polyvinyl chloride coating to outer surfaces of couplings.
2. Extend polyvinyl chloride sleeve equal to outside diameter of uncoated conduit beyond both ends of coupling approximately 1 pipe diameter or 1-1/2 inches, whichever is smaller.
3. Provide minimum 40 mil thick coatings on couplings and sleeves.
4. Bond polyvinyl chloride coating to outer surface of conduit bodies and fittings.
5. Extend polyvinyl chloride sleeves from hubs.
6. Provide same coating thickness on conduit bodies, fittings, and sleeve walls as on couplings in length and thickness.
7. Coat covers on conduit bodies on both sides so covers are completely interchangeable.
8. Coat interior of conduit couplings, sleeves, and conduit bodies with corrosionresistant urethane finish.
D. Ensure that inside of conduit bodies remain undisturbed during processing and retain manufacturer's finish.
E. Polyvinyl Chloride Coated, Mounting Hardware, and Associated Fittings:
1. All mounting hardware and associated fittings shall be polyvinyl chloride coated in accordance with NEMA RN-1.
2. The polyvinyl chloride exterior coating shall have a normal thickness of 40 mils (.040 inch) except where part configuration or application otherwise dictate.
3. All fasteners for polyvinyl chloride coated fittings and mounting hardware shall be of the type 316 stainless steel.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect rigid, hot-dip galvanized steel conduit during manufacture for conformance to UL 6 and ANSI C80.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit runs in accordance with schematic representation indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-5 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
the Engineer.
B. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with condulet fittings.
C. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches.
D. Expose conduit runs in buildings and structures, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
E. Securely fasten exposed conduits with clamps or straps. Run exposed conduit on walls and ceilings only, parallel to planes of walls or ceilings. Do not run conduit diagonally.
Securely fasten exposed polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or straps.
F. Use flexible conduit for short lengths required to facilitate connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, or control equipment.
G. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls 1 inch away from wall on an accepted channel. Use hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel channels, consistent with type of conduit being installed. Do not run conduit in water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
H. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. Seal joints with accepted conductive sealant compound and make watertight. Set up joints tight. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.
I. Install runs between pull boxes or junction boxes with total bends equaling not more than 270 degrees. Install conduits as necessary to limit bends to not more than 270 degrees. Install NEC required pull boxes at locations acceptable to the Engineer. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture. Cap spare conduits and provide plastic pulling tape below threaded cap. Provide bonding bushing and bond wire.
J. Provide appropriate hangers and fasteners to suit applications.
K. After complete installation of 2 inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.
L. Clean and ensure that new and existing conduit runs are not crushed or creased.
Verify internal dimensions of existing conduit prior to installation of conductors. Verify that no foreign objects or obstructions are present in conduit prior to installing conductors.
M. Install conduit system to provide firm mechanical assemblies with electrical conductivity throughout.
N. Install expansion fittings across expansion joints, including expansion joints at existing structures, and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction as indicated on the Drawings.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-6 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
O. Install conduits complete between outlets, boxes, and circuit source before conductors are installed.
P. Install conduit thruwall seals where indicated on the Drawings.
3.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE-COATED RIGID STEEL
A. Attach cover to conduit body with Type 316 stainless steel screws.
B. Where patching is required, apply 40 mil thick polyvinyl chloride coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install and patch coated material holiday free and according to manufacturer’s recommended installation and patching instructions.
3.03 RIGID NONMETALLIC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
A. Reinforce encasement as indicated on the Drawings. Install conduit supports at 30-inch intervals.
3.04 ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING
A. Provide supports spaced at minimum 5 foot on center within 2 feet of each outlet box, junction box, pull box, cabinet, or other enclosure.
B. Use and install electrical metallic tubing in accordance with NEC Article 348.
3.05 CONDUIT SEALS
A. Install conduit entering or leaving NEC Article 500 hazardous areas with conduit seals.
B. Install conduit seals in other hazardous locations as required by NEC.
C. Provide drains on conduit seals in locations where water accumulation is likely to enter a device or enclosure.
3.06 SCHEDULES
A. Conduit Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, conduits shall be in accordance with NEC, and the minimum specified as follows:
B. Conduit Uses and Applications:
1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC) : (Not Used)
2. Flexible Conduit:
a. Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or where required for special servicing.
1) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit.
2) Use type NFC with PVC conduit.
b. Minimum size ¾ inch.
1) One half inch when required for connections to instruments. c. Maximum length: 36 inches
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16133-7 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3. PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Conduit:
a. All exposed outdoor and indoor locations except where EMT is noted per Section 3.06.B.5
b. Minimum Size:
1) As indicated in the Cable and Conduit Schedule.
2) Minimum ¾ inch where not indicated on the Drawings.
3) Minimum 1 inch when encased in Concrete.
4. PVC Schedule 40 : (Not Used)
5. Electric Metallic Tubing: All exposed conduit mounted and supported directly to the metal building structural members. Transition to PVC Coated Rigid Metallic Conduit within 12 inches of leaving the metal building structural members.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16134-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16134
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Outlet boxes, device boxes, metallic pull boxes, junction boxes, termination boxes.
2. Raceway System boxes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16010.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (ANSI/NEMA):
1. OS1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
2. OS2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
B. National Electrical Code (NEC).
1. Article 370 - Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies and Fittings.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA FB1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
D. Underwriters Laboratory:
1. UL Standard 498 and 514.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittal in accordance with Section 01330 and 16010.
B. Shop Drawings: Include exact locations and sizes of pull boxes for Engineer's acceptance prior to fabrication and installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 16010.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Device Boxes, Metallic Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes: One of the following or equal:
1. Crouse-Hinds.
2. Appleton.
3. Hofmann
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16134-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
B. All metal pull boxes shall be stainless steel with hinges and gasket.
2.02 DEVICE BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. NEMA 4X FRP, compatible with the location and conduit system being used, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 CONCRETE PULL BOXES ADN MANHOLES
A. Precast concrete pull boxes in locations indicated on the Drawings and as required by NEC.
B. Designed for H20 traffic conditions, with pull box and cover designed for heavy traffic bridge loading.
C. Minimum 3 feet by 4 feet by depth as necessary for duct bank depth, Constructed of reinforced Class A concrete.
D. Provide with ¾ inch diameter pulling irons located on each end.
E. Identification: Furnish covers with “Electrical” or “Instrumentation” and box number engraved on top side.
F. Provide galvanized metal supports for all wire. Loop and Tie off wire in a neat manner so it does not lay on the bottom of the duct bank.
G. Provide wire labels on all wire in manholes and pull boxes.
H. Provide sump location in bottom of box to allow a pump to be installed to pump water out of the box.
I. Lids and risers as Indicated on the Drawings.
2.04 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) BOXES
A. NEMA 4X Fiberglass Enclosures:
1. Provide enclosures that consist of base and cover which shall be heavy-duty hot compression molded from fiberglass reinforced polyester compound containing not less than 25 percent fiberglass by weight. Transparent covers, where specified or indicated on the Drawings, shall be polycarbonate. The enclosures shall be provided with cover hinges manufactured from nonmetallic materials. The cover latch system shall be nonmetallic.
2. Provide the enclosures with gasket system of neoprene material cemented into a molded labyrinth on the cover.
2.05 FASTENERS
A. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices.
B. Screws, Nuts, Bolts, and Other Threaded Fasteners: Stainless Steel.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16134-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the National Electrical Code.
B. Terminal blocks installed in junction/terminal boxes as specified in Section 16050.
C. Provide weatherproof conduit hubs for all conduit connections to pull boxes.
D. Size pull boxes to meet National Electrical Code requirements and to provide sufficient room for the future conduits and cables indicated on the Drawings.
E. Furnish and install pull boxes as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Install additional pull boxes as required to meet cable manufacturer's pulling tension requirements.
F. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted by obstructions such as pipes, valves, ladders.
G. Secure pull box covers with type 316 stainless steel screws or bolts with coated threads.
H. Install concrete pull boxes on 12-inches compacted clean aggregate base course as specified in Section 02722.
I. Install Cable support channels on sides of pull boxes and coil and hang cable in a neat manner inside all pull boxes. Wire laying on the floor of the box or cables stretched tight through a box will not be accepted.
J. Concrete pull boxes shall have pull box number and service engraved onto the lid.
Provide all other pull boxes with lamecoid nameplate with pull box number and service on each pull box with engraved text.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust equipment as required.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16135-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16135
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cabinets and enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments, terminal blocks, and similar equipment.
B. Related Section:
1. Refer to Section 16050.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings, enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments, terminal blocks, and similar equipment shall be NEMA 12 for indoor and NEMA 4X for outdoor installations and shall be compatible with the conduit system being used.
2. Specific control panel enclosures shall be as specified in DIVISION 13 and 16 of these Specifications or as indicated on the Drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittal in accordance with Section 01330 and 16010.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide 12 month warranty from data of acceptance by the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Indoors: NEMA 12 Steel Enclosures: One of the following or equal:
1. Hoffman Engineering Company.
2. Ritta.
B. Outdoors: NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures: One of the following or equal:
1. Hoffman Engineering Company.
2. Carlon.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION
A. All Enclosures:
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16135-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Make enclosures from 14 gauge steel with continuous welded seams. Doors shall have full length piano hinges with the door removable by pulling the hinge pin.
2. Provide a rolled lip around 3 sides of the door and around all sides of the enclosure opening.
3. Provide hasp and staple for padlocking.
4. Provide a print pocket for each enclosure.
5. Panels with PLCs shall have an outer and inner door. Outer door shall be plane.
Inner door shall have all devices mounted on it.
6. All outdoor panels with a PLC or other temperature sensitive devices shall have an air conditioner included with the panel for proper temperature control.
7. Provide Lamicoid name plate with stainless steel screws. Glued on name plates are not accepted.
B. NEMA 12 Steel Enclosures
1. Attach gasket with oil-resistant adhesive and hold it in place with steel retaining strips.
C. NEMA 4X, 316 Stainless Steel Enclosures:
1. Provide minimum 14 gauge 316 Stainless Steel Enclosure with 316 Stainless Steel Hardware.
2. Provide enclosures that consist of a base and cover with cover hinges to form a weather tight seal between the cabinet and the doors.
3. Provide the enclosures with gasket system of neoprene material cemented into a molded labyrinth on the cover.
D. NEMA 4X, FRP Enclosures:
1. FRP enclosure and hinges.
2. 316 Stainless Steel Hardware
3. Provide enclosures that consist of a base and cover with cover hinges to forma a weather tight seal between the cabinet and the doors.
4. Provide the enclosures with gasket system of neoprene material cemented into a molded labyrinth on the cover.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Steel Enclosures:
1. Do not paint NEMA 4X enclosures. Door fronts shall be ground smooth. Print pockets and interior panels shall be steel with a white enamel finish.
2. Provide NEMA 12 and NEMA 4 enclosures with white enamel interior finish. The finish shall be light grey enamel, ANSI 61 exterior, over phosphatized surfaces.
Panels shall be white enamel. Special finishes and colors shall be furnished for wet locations. Other portions of these Contract Documents shall be checked for special conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install Cabinets and Enclosures per manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16140-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Wiring devices including the following:
1. Snap switches and toggle switches.
2. Plugs and receptacles.
3. Control and pushbutton stations.
4. Pilot devices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16010.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittal in accordance with Section 01330 and 16010.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide industrial grade products for wiring devices. Commercial grade products are not acceptable, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SNAP OR TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Hubbell.
2. General Electric.
3. Leviton.
4. Bryant.
B. Number of Poles: As indicated on the Drawings.
C. Rating: 20 amperes, 125 volt.
D. Special Switches and Covers: As specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.02 120 VOLT RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Hubbell.
2. General Electric.
3. Leviton.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16140-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
4. Bryant.
B. Duplex Receptacles: 2-pole, 3-wire, grounded, 125 volts, industrial, rated at 20 amperes.
1. Special Receptacles and Covers: As specified in Section 16134 or as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles (GFI): Rated at 20 amperes at 125 volts alternating current.
2.03 LOCAL PUSHBUTTON MOTOR CONTROL STATIONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Furnas Electric Company.
2. Square D Company.
3. Allen Bradley.
4. Siemens.
5. Cutler Hammer.
6. General Electric.
B. Types: Heavy duty, oil-tight/water-tight.
C. Components: Selector Switches, pilot light, and pushbuttons.
D. Enclosures: As follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified:
1. For Nonhazardous Indoor Locations: NEMA 12.
2. For Hazardous Indoor Locations: NEMA 7.
3. For Outdoor Locations: NEMA 4X.
4. For Hazardous Outdoor Locations: NEMA 7.
E. Field Located Maintained Pushbuttons: Red mushroom head, push-to-stop, pull-toreset, with maintained contacts.
2.04 PILOT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Furnas Electric Company.
2. Square D Company.
3. Allen Bradley.
4. Siemens.
5. Cutler Hammer.
6. General Electric.
B. Type: Heavy-duty, suitable for mounting in control stations, on switchgear, switchboards, variable frequency drives, motor control centers, control panels, and other electrical equipment.
C. Components: Oil-tight/water-tight pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot light, and incidental items.
D. Casting: Durable 1 piece with chrome plated octagonal mounting nuts.
E. Pushbuttons: Heavy duty plastic.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16140-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
F. Pilot Light Lenses: Shatter resistant plastic, push-to-test.
G. Pilot Lights: LED type only.
2.05 CORD CONNECTOR GRIPS
A. Non-hazardous Areas:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Killark, Series Z.
.
2. Aluminum cord connector.
3. Stainless steel mesh grip.
B. Hazardous Areas:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Killark, Series ZE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings.
3.02 LOCAL PUSHBUTTON MOTOR CONTROL STATION INSTALLATION A. Install Start-Lockout-Stop pushbutton control stations adjacent to every motor unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust wiring devices as specified in Section 01756.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect products until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16412-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set SECTION 16412
LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Low voltage circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Standards Publication No. AB1.
B. National Electrical Code (NEC): Article 430-52.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Circuit Breakers: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. General Electric
2. Square D
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS - LOW VOLTAGE
A. Circuit Breaker Frame and Trip Ratings: As indicated on the Drawings and coordinated with the ratings of the equipment actually furnished. Modify ratings where necessary to suit this equipment.
B. Panelboard Circuit Breakers: Bolt-in type. Snap-in circuit breakers are not acceptable.
2.03 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Ambient compensating which provides inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermal magnetic element. Accomplish compensation by a secondary bimetal that will allow the breaker to carry rated current between 25 degrees Centigrade and 50 degrees Centigrade with tripping characteristics which are approximately the same throughout this temperature range.
B. Circuit Breaker Ratings and Modifications: As indicated on the Drawings.
C. On Breakers with Interchangeable, Thermal, Adjustable Magnetic Trip: The accessibility and position of the adjustment knob shall not be changed from those on the standard breaker.
D. Breakers: Operated by a handle and provided with a quick-make, quick-break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16412-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
1. Tripping Due to Overload, Short Circuit, or Ground Fault: Clearly indicate tripping by the handle automatically assuming a position between the manual ON and OFF positions.
2. Latch Surfaces: Ground and polished.
3. Poles: Constructed so they all open, close and trip simultaneously.
4. Conform to the applicable requirements of NEMA Standard No. AB1.
E. Breakers: Completely enclosed in a molded case.
1. Non-interchangeable Trip Breakers: Sealed covers.
2. Interchangeable trip breakers: Sealed trip unit to prevent tampering.
3. Ampere Ratings: Clearly visible.
4. Contacts: Non-welding silver alloy.
5. Arc Extinction: Accomplished by means of arc chutes.
6. Ground Fault Protection: Provide on main circuit breaker on switchboards and motor control centers.
F. Minimum Interrupting Ratings: Not less than 65,000 RMS amperes.
G. Circuit breakers for lighting panelboards shall be rated to 22,000 RMS amperes.
2.04 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS
A. Motor Circuits: Protected by motor circuit protectors, as permitted by Item 1 below:
B. Motor Circuit Protectors: Operated by a handle and provided with a quick-make, quick break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
1. Tripping: Clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuming a position between the manual ON and OFF positions.
2. Latch Surfaces: Ground and polished.
3. Poles: Constructed so they all open, close, and trip simultaneously.
C. Motor Circuit Protectors: Completely enclosed in a molded case.
1. Trip Unit: Sealed to prevent tampering.
2. Ampere Ratings: Clearly visible.
3. Contacts: Non-welding silver alloy.
4. Arc Extinction: Accomplished by means of arc chutes.
D. Provide each pole of motor circuit protectors with instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a single adjustable magnetic only element. The single adjustment screw is to adjust all poles simultaneously.
E. Furnish motor circuit protectors with provision for locking the maximum achievable trip setting to values less than maximum obtainable trip setting. Each adjustment typically to have 8 main setting points and mid-setting points following a linear scale so that each point has a significant value within calibration tolerances.
F. Motor Circuit Protectors: Suitable for use with current limiters, having 100,000 ampere interrupting capacity and a built-in trip indicator, that are fully coordinated with the motor circuit protectors so that the motor circuit protectors will open all 3 phases if the limiter operates.
1. Current limiters shall be so constructed that they can only be replaced by an identical or similar limiter having the same interrupting capacity.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16412-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set G. Minimum Interrupting Ratings: Not less than 65,000 RMS amperes.
H. Motor Circuit Protectors Continuous Current Rating: As specified herein or as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Setting: The motor circuit protectors setting shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s protective device coordination study as accepted by the ENGINEER and in accordance with the motor circuit protectors manufacturer’s recommendation based on motor nameplate current or actual motor current, whichever is larger.
I. Utilize an instantaneous trip circuit breaker or motor circuit protector only as part of a listed combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload, and short-circuit and ground-fault protection in accordance with NEC Article 430-52.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16950-1 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
SECTION 16950
ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Acceptance testing of electrical system, wiring, equipment, and grounding.
B. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Section 16010.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA):
1. ATS-2013 - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittal in accordance with Section 01330 and 16010.
B. Pre-test Submittals:
1. Testing service qualifications.
2. Test personnel qualifications (resumes).
3. Equipment testing schedule.
4. Sample equipment test data forms for all equipment and systems to be tested.
5. Functional testing data sheets for all systems tested. Functional testing plan shall include individual testing line items for each alarm and indication feature for each mode of operation (i.e. Local, Off and Remote). Each functional test line item shall be developed in a “cause and effect” format which shall include an initial condition/set-up description field, action field (i.e. activate high-high level alarm), description of expected result field and “Expected Result Observed” field which shall include spaces for both the Contractor’s and Engineer’s initials.
C. Post-test Submittals: Summary Test Report consists of the following:
1. Summary of testing for the project.
2. Description of the equipment tested.
3. Description of the test and test procedures.
4. Test results.
5. Conclusions and recommendations.
6. Completed test forms, including witness's signatures.
7. List of test equipment and calibration documents.
8. Date and time.
9. Include the Following Data Tabulated for Each Piece of Equipment:
a. Circuit number.
b. Equipment or motor name and tag number (where applicable). c. Nameplate full-load-ampere rating.
d. Motor service factor.
e. Motor ambient temperature rating.
f. Overload relay rating.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16950-2 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
g. Measured full load current.
h. Measured discharge pressure (where applicable).
i. Measured flow rate (where applicable).
D. Submit Equipment Testing Schedule no later than 14 days prior to scheduled date of testing.
E. Project Record Documents: Submit as specified in Section 01770. Note or indicate wiring deviations from Contract Documents on Project Record Documents.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Firm Qualifications:
1. Obtain the services of an independent testing service firm that meets the Federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1910.7 and has a work history and qualifications acceptable to Engineer.
2. Prequalified Testing Services and Manufacturing Firms:
a. General Electric Company.
b. Cutler-Hammer.
c. Square D Company Technical Service Divisions.
d. Electro-Test Inc.
3. Qualifications of other testing service firms may be submitted.
4. Testing service or testing personnel may be accepted or rejected based upon, but not limited to, the testing equipment intended to be used, the qualifications of the firm, and personnel.
B. Test Equipment Traceability:
1. Testing firm shall have a calibration program which maintains applicable test instrumentation and equipment within rated accuracy.
2. Equipment and instruments used to evaluate electrical performance shall be calibrated to a secondary standard traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.
3. Test equipment operating instructions and procedures shall be with the test equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that electrical work is free from improper grounds, short circuits, and overloads.
B. Verify correctness of wiring first by visual comparison of the conductor connections with connection diagrams.
C. Make individual circuit continuity checks by using electrical circuit testers.
D. Verify correctness of wiring by actual electrical operation of electrical and mechanical devices in both manual and automatic modes of operation.
ATTACHMENT 1
August, 2022 16950-3 F2E/Food Waste Processing Facility Bid Set
3.02 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Perform equipment integrity testing and invite Owner and Engineer to witness testing.
All equipment integrity testing shall be successfully completed prior to energization of equipment. Equipment that does not initially pass integrity testing shall be repaired and re-tested until successful results are obtained.
B. Perform electrical acceptance testing in accordance with latest NETA Standards.
C. Perform functional tests to assure that electrical equipment specified to be tested will operate in accordance with the specified requirements. Functional testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Prior to performing witnessed functional tests, the Contractor shall perform a “dry run” on all functional test line items to verify that each tested system operates successfully. During witnessed functional testing, should the tested systems not operate as expected, the testing shall be halted and re-scheduled with no time extension granted to the Contractor for this additional testing work.
D. Test motorized equipment to verify conformance with the Contract Documents and for acceptance.
E. Install equipment with acceptable data. Equipment for which acceptable test data has not been submitted, or has been submitted but rejected, shall be deemed as not meeting Contract requirements.
F. Test Project electrical equipment, including 600 volt electrical distribution equipment and grounding. Complete test reports for each individual piece of equipment.
G. Test Project electrical equipment included on, but not limited to, the following list:
1. Low-Voltage 600-volt Cables.
2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers.
3. Grounding System.
4. Grounding system connection to new equipment.
5. System Function Tests.
3.03 SUMMARY TEST REPORT
A. Upon completion of testing in every area, submit summary test report for acceptance by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENT 1